You are on page 1of 290

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual

44-01-25-14C 1/99

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder

Copyright, Notices, and Trademark
Printed in U.S.A. – © Copyright 1999 by Honeywell Inc. Revision C – 1/18/99

While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer. In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages. The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice. This document was prepared using Information Mapping methodologies and formatting principles.

Symbol Definitions
This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for additional information. This symbol appears next to required information in the manual. WARNING, risk of electric shock. This symbol warns the user of a potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4 Vpeak, or 60 Vdc may be accessible. Protective earth terminal. For connection of the earth (green or green/yellow) supply system conductor. Noiseless earth terminal. Provided for connection of the noiseless earth supply system conductor.
Honeywell Industrial Automation and Control Automation College 2820 West Kelton Lane Phoenix, AZ 85023 (602) 313-5669

!

ii

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

1/99

About This Document
Abstract
This manual contains instructions for installation, operation, and troubleshooting of the DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder.

Revision Notes
The following list provides notes concerning all revisions of this document.
Rev. ID Rev A Rev B Rev C Date 4/14/98 7/24/98 1/18/99 Notes Update includes Auxiliary Output and FM Limit wiring Update includes CE models, UL model wiring, setpoint programming, timer, Accutune II, display enhancements, and communication option. Update includes chart installation changes and foreign language safety instructions.

Warranty
The device described herein has been manufactured and tested for correct operation and is warranted as follows: The DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder carries a two year warranty. This warranty includes immediate technical assistance via a toll-free telephone number and complete replacement of the recorder, if necessary.

Technical Assistance
If you encounter a problem with your DR4300 recorder, review all the configuration data to verify that your selections are consistent with your application (that is, inputs, outputs, alarms, limits, etc.). If the problem persists after checking the above, you can get technical assistance by dialing:

1-800-423-9883 USA and Canada
An engineer will discuss your problem with you. Please have your complete model number, serial number, and software version available. The model and serial numbers can be found on the chassis nameplate. See 8.2 for instructions for viewing the software version. If it is determined that a hardware problem exists, a replacement part or recorder will be shipped with instructions for returning the defective unit. Do not return your recorder without authorization from Honeywell’s Technical Assistance Center or until the replacement has been received. For a list of frequently asked questions and their answers, dial Honeywell’s Faxback 24 hour service:

1-888-423-9883 USA and Canada
For European Honeywell representatives, refer to Appendix G.

Trademarks
DR4300 and Accutune II are trademarks of Honeywell Inc. Information Mapping is a trademark of Information Mapping Inc. Modbus is a trademark of Modicon, Inc. Other brands or product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

1/99

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

iii

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder

iv

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

1/99

Contents
1. OVERVIEW.............................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Model Number Breakdown .......................................................................................................... 1-4 1.3 About This Manual....................................................................................................................... 1-8

2. INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Mounting Considerations and Overall Dimensions...................................................................... 2-5 2.3 Mounting Methods ....................................................................................................................... 2-6 2.3.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 2-6 2.3.2 Mounting Flush in Panel (New Panel Cutout)....................................................................... 2-7 2.3.3 Mounting on Surface (of Panel or Wall) ............................................................................... 2-8 2.4 Wiring Prerequisites..................................................................................................................... 2-10 2.5 Input Wiring................................................................................................................................ 2-14 2.5.1 Power Wiring....................................................................................................................... 2-14 2.5.2 Analog Input Wiring ............................................................................................................ 2-18 2.5.3 Digital Inputs (Optional)...................................................................................................... 2-20 2.5.4 Communication (Optional) .................................................................................................. 2-22 2.6 Output Wiring............................................................................................................................. 2-24 2.6.1 Discrete Outputs .................................................................................................................. 2-25 2.6.2 Current Output ..................................................................................................................... 2-29 2.6.3 Transmitter Power Out......................................................................................................... 2-31

3. CONFIGURATION, STARTUP, AND OPERATION OF BASIC RECORDER WITHOUT DISPLAY ...............................................................................................3-1
3.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Configuration (Recording Set Up) ............................................................................................... 3-2 3.2.1 Setting Configuration and Input Switches ............................................................................. 3-2 3.3 Startup and Operation of Recorder without Display .................................................................. 3-15 3.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................. 3-15 3.3.2 Preparing the Recorder for Operation.................................................................................. 3-16 3.3.3 Running the Optional Step Test........................................................................................... 3-17 3.3.4 Startup.................................................................................................................................. 3-19

4. CONFIGURATION, STARTUP AND OPERATION OF RECORDER WITH DISPLAY4-1
4.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Operator Interface on Recorder with Display and Keypad .......................................................... 4-2 4.3 Configuration (Recording and Output Set Up)............................................................................. 4-4 4.3.1 Overview................................................................................................................................ 4-4

1/99

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

v

................. 4-59 4................................................................................4 Startup of Recorder with Display and Keypad........Product Manual 1/99 .............................................................15 Alarms Set Up Group...................... 5-8 5....................................... ROUTINE MAINTENANCE.. 4-8 4..............................4 Configuration Tips...................... INPUT AND OUTPUT CALIBRATION FOR RECORDER WITH DISPLAY .............................................................................................................5 Operation of Recorder with Display and Keypad ........7 Input Parameters Set Up Group .......................................................................3 How to Get Started ................................................................21 Limit Control Configuration ............. 4-19 4................ 5-6 5..3.............................................................................................DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4.......3.................5..........................4........................................5-1 5..........................2 Preparing the Recorder for Startup ......3.........................3............................................4 Input Calibration Set Up and Wiring.11 Control Parameters Set Up Group ........................... 4-22 4... 4-63 5.............................................. 4-20 4...................................................4.................................................... 4-51 4................................... 4-59 4................................................................1 General Calibration Set Up.........................................................3................. 4-43 4......3 Replacing the Ink Cartridge....................................................4....................................................................... 4-47 4......................... 5-11 5....................... 4-12 4..........2 Replacing the Chart . 4-41 4........... 6-1 6........................................................ 4-50 4...............................................................3...............18 Remote Switch (Digital Inputs) Set Up Group ........................................5.....................................................20 Configuration Record Sheet...............................10 Totalizer Parameters Set Up Group ...................................................................... 6-3 vi DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder ............................................................... 5-6 5.................3........................................... 5-9 5.................................4.............................................3 Input Calibration Preliminary Information............ 5-2 5...................3.........3..................................3....... 5-1 5..............5-4 5.....................................3................16 Auxiliary Output Set Up Group.................... 4-18 4....................12 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group ....................................................................... 4-5 4................................1 Overview......................................... 4-37 4....1 Overview..........4.................................................2 Operator Functions .......4...................................... 6-2 6................................................................................................................................ 4-30 4..........................4 Completing Preparation and Startup.......................... 4-50 4.. 4-14 4.................................................................................................................................................................1 Monitoring Your Recorder ..4........................... 5-13 6..........14 Timer Set Up Group.........................................................................4.............................3.................................. 4-7 4........................................................................5 Switch Settings ............................................................................... 4-35 4.3...........................................................................3 Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath or Ice Point Reference.............................3. 5-7 5................3.3....................................19 Lock Out Parameter Set Up Group ......... 4-52 4........................................................... 4-54 4.......................................3.....................................6-1 6.3....................13 Setpoint Ramp/Program Set Up Group............................................... 4-49 4......2 Thermocouple Inputs Using a Compensated Calibrator....................................................3.....................17 Communication Set Up Group.4 RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) Inputs .............................. 4-46 4................ 4-6 4...........................9 Chart Parameters Set Up Group................................................................................................3 Running the Optional Step Test............1 Overview...................................2 Configuration Prompts....3.....................................................................................6 Configuration Procedure..............6 Current Output Calibration ...... 4-44 4.........5 Input Calibration Procedure.........................8 Pen Parameters Set Up Group................................................................................................ 4-38 4............................................2 Input Calibration Minimum and Maximum Range Values .................

........2 Recorder Failure Troubleshooting... 8-15 8................................. 8-11 8..................................................................................................4 Replacing the Servo Assembly.....5 Troubleshooting Procedures ............. 8-11 8.9-1 9.............................2 Recorder Failure Troubleshooting...5.........5............................................ 8-4 8.................. 8-4 8...................4 Alignment of Pen at Zero and 100% ............................................................................3 Pen Trace Troubleshooting.......... 7-3 7.................1 Overview................................................................................................. 8-12 8....7 Troubleshooting Relay Output..............5 Troubleshooting Erratic Pen Movement...........7-1 7............................................................................................................... 8-14 8............................. 8-5 8..................................3 Troubleshooting Procedures ......3.........................9-6 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .......................5...................5 Replacing the Chart Motor and Chart Hub..........................................................................................................8 Troubleshooting External Alarm Function .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-21 9...................................................................................... 8-19 8.......................................... 7-9 8................ 8-1 8.............................................2 Troubleshooting Aids .......... 8-20 8....6................................................................................................................................3 Self Diagnostics ......................... 7-4 7......................................................... 8-6 8.......................................1 Overview............3..... 7-6 7.... 7-5 7.3 Replacing Pen Arm 2..........................................................2 Observable Symptoms of Failure ....5............................................................................................................................................... 9-4 9..................................................................................................................................................... 8-17 8........................10 Troubleshooting Modbus Communications................................ 9-5 9..............................1 Overview...................................................................................................6 Alignment of Pen at Zero and Span................................................................................. 8-18 8..3 Pen Trace Troubleshooting.................................................................4 Chart Rotation Troubleshooting ............................................................................3.................................................................. 7-4 7.................................................................2 View Status of Tests ................. REPLACING HARDWARE ASSEMBLIES .............................................2 Replacing Pen Arm 1..........6 Replacing the Printed Circuit Assembly ......................................3...... 9-2 9...........................................................5........................................................5...........1 Overview............4 Observable Symptoms of Failure .5.....................5.................4 Chart Rotation Troubleshooting .....................3.................5.......................................5.....................................................3.............................................................................................4 Error Messages ................3...............................6 Troubleshooting the Keypad and Display ........................................ 7-8 7........ TROUBLESHOOTING AND PEN ALIGNMENT OF BASIC RECORDER WITHOUT DISPLAY .......................................................... TROUBLESHOOTING AND PEN ALIGNMENT OF RECORDER WITH DISPLAY8-1 8..............................................................................................................................................................3 Background Tests...........1 Power up tests ......... 9-1 9........................................................9 Troubleshooting Remote Switch (Digital Input) Function ......................3.4 Maximizing Pen Life ................. 7-1 7...................... 8-6 8................................................3.................5 Troubleshooting Erratic Pen Movement.................................... 8-16 8.................................................................................. 6-4 7.....1 Overview......... 8-13 8................................................Product Manual vii ..................................................................................................... 9-3 9..................... 8-10 8... 8-3 8................................. 7-7 7...................................................

.............................................................8 Replacing the Digital Input Printed Circuit Assembly.......................................................................................................... HOW TO APPLY DIGITAL INSTRUMENTATION IN SEVERE ELECTRICAL NOISE ENVIRONMENTS...................................3 Time Proportional Duplex Control..................................................1 Overview.....................2 Potential Noise Sources ...................................... A-1 A.................................................E-4 E.......9 Replacing the Totalizer Battery...............1 Single Range Charts ................................................................4 Recommended Wiring Practices...2 Dual Range Charts... D-1 D............................................................ SETPOINT RAMP/SOAK PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION.................................................................................................10 Replacing the Communication Printed Circuit Assembly...................................................1 Overview............... C-1 C..E-1 E.............................................................................................................................................Product Manual 1/99 ....................................................................................... ACCURACY.............................................................. 9-10 9...................... B-1 B..10-1 10.......................................1 Overview.................... C-7 D..................................................................................................................................................E-2 E.................................... D-5 E.....................2 Exploded Views....................... 9-8 9............................................5 Power Source Considerations............................ D-2 D.. A-4 A............................. A-6 A.............................................................................................................................................. AVAILABLE 10-INCH CHARTS .4 Setpoint Program Prompt Hierarchy ........ 10-2 A................................................................................................................................................................................ MANUAL TUNING ..........................................................................1 Overview.........................................................................................................................5 Run/Monitor the Program..........................2 Time or Current Proportional Simplex Control...................................................E-11 F....................................................................... A-7 B..3 Drawing a Ramp/Soak Profile ....................................................... B-2 C...................................F-1 viii DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder ......................... B-1 B..... PARTS LIST ........ A-3 A...................................................................................................................... D-1 D................................................... A-2 A..3 Prevention Methods ...................................................DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 9..............................................2 Typical Reference Accuracy .............................................................7 Replacing the Display and Keypad Assembly.................................................................. 10-1 10...........6 Noise Suppression at the Source ................................................................................ 9-9 9.......................................................... E-1 E........................................................................................ A-1 A.................................................................................................................................. USING ACCUTUNE II..................................................................................................................... 9-11 10.........................1 Overview.......E-8 E........2 Program Contents ........................................................................... C-1 C........

....1 Overview............... H-1 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .......................Product Manual ix ............ HONEYWELL SERVICE CENTERS ............................................2 Starting and Stopping Tuning with Accutune II..........F..........................................3 Using Accutune with Duplex (Heat/Cool) Control ................................F-2 F..................................................................................... G-1 H........................................................................................ FOREIGN LANGUAGE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.................F-3 G....F-1 F...........................

........... 2-24 Table 2-12 Relay Output Wiring ..................... 4-19 Table 4-9 Totalizer Function Definitions........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-67 x DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder ............................................................................................. 4-41 Table 4-16 Communication Parameter Definitions..................................... 4-51 Table 4-21 Procedure for Running the Step Test......................................................................................................... 4-9 Table 4-5 Configuration Procedure..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-2 Table 3-3 Configuration and Input Switch Settings for Models without Display .................................... 2-22 Table 2-11 Output Terminal Use for Output Algorithm and Option Combinations........... 2-18 Table 2-9 Digital Input Wiring ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-19 Table 4-1 Topics in Section 4 ................................................ 4-66 Table 4-32 Procedure for Selecting Factory or Field Calibration Values ......................... 3-17 Table 3-6 Startup Procedure .......................................................... 4-14 Table 4-7 Pen Parameter Definitions ................................................................................. 4-54 Table 4-23 Power-Up Diagnostic Tests ........................................................ 3-1 Table 3-2 Procedure for Configuring Model without Display ............ 4-18 Table 4-8 Chart Parameter Definitions ................ 4-32 Table 4-12 Setpoint Ramp Parameter Definitions................................................................................................................................................................ 4-49 Table 4-20 Preparing the Recorder for Operation.......................................................................................................... 2-26 Table 2-13 Current Output Wiring.... 2-31 Table 3-1 Topics in Section 3 .................................................................................................................................... 4-57 Table 4-26 Meaning of Indicators.............. 4-36 Table 4-13 Timer Parameter Definitions .. 2-7 Table 2-4 Mounting Flush on a Surface (of Panel or Wall) .................................. 2-15 Table 2-8 Analog Input Wiring. 4-46 Table 4-19 Limit Control Parameter Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-56 Table 4-25 Procedure for Starting the Recorder ................................................................................. 4-1 Table 4-2 Key Functions................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1 or 2 Pen Models ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-3 Table 4-3 Configuration Tips...................................................................................................... 4-60 Table 4-27 Lower Display Operating Parameter Labels ....................................................................................................... 4-37 Table 4-14 Alarm Parameter Definitions .............................................................................DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Tables Table 2-1 Topics in Section 2 ........................................................ 4-20 Table 4-10 Control Parameter Definitions ..................................................................................................................................... 4-45 Table 4-18 Lockout Parameter Definitions . 2-13 Table 2-6 Wiring Illustrations.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-16 Table 3-5 Procedure for Running the Step Test................................................................................... 4-38 Table 4-15 Auxiliary Output Parameter Definitions .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-12 Table 4-6 Input Parameter Definitions.................................... 2-29 Table 2-14 Transmitter Power Out Wiring ........................................ 4-61 Table 4-28 Error Messages ............................................................. 2-1 Table 2-2 Operating Limits and Condensed Specifications ................................................................. 4-62 Table 4-29 Procedure for Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode .............................................................................................. 2-2 Table 2-3 Mounting Flush in a New Panel Cutout................................................................................................................................................. 3-5 Table 3-4 Preparing the Recorder for Operation........... 4-65 Table 4-31 Procedure for Displaying or Changing the Alarm Setpoints............................................ 4-52 Table 4-22 Procedure for Setting Chart Time and Applying Power ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-43 Table 4-17 Remote Switch Parameter Definitions ........................Product Manual 1/99 ............................................................................ 2-20 Table 2-10 Communication Wiring ... 2-13 Table 2-7 Procedure for Power Wiring Models......................................................... 4-64 Table 4-30 Procedure for Changing the Control Setpoints ........................................................................... 4-55 Table 4-24 Procedure for Testing the Displays and Keys.......................................................................... 2-8 Table 2-5 Wiring Bundling Categories ...................................................... 4-7 Table 4-4 SW6 Input Switch Settings for Models Having Display and Keypad.................................................................................. 4-22 Table 4-11 Tuning Parameter Definitions.........

...... 8-7 Table 8-6 Observable Symptoms of Failure................................................................................................................... 10-3 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder ................................. 7-7 Table 7-6 Troubleshooting Erratic Pen Movement Symptoms ........................................................... 9-6 Table 9-7 Procedure for Replacing the Display and Keypad Assembly ........... 4-70 Table 5-1 Topics in Section 5 .................................................................................................................................................... 7-6 Table 7-5 Troubleshooting Chart Rotation Failure Symptoms ............................... 4-69 Table 4-35 Procedure for Resetting Limit Controller .................... 9-8 Table 9-8 Procedure for Replacing the Digital Input Printed Circuit Assembly..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-3 Table 5-3 Equipment Needed for Calibration ................... 5-5 Table 5-5 General Calibration Set Up Procedure ....... 8-1 Table 8-2 Procedure for Identifying the Software Version .................................................................................... 7-9 Table 8-1 Topics in Section 8 .............................................................................................................................. 9-10 Table 9-10 Procedure for Replacing the Communication Printed Circuit Assembly.................... 10-2 Table 10-3 Chart Plate Assembly Parts.................................................................... 8-10 Table 8-7 Troubleshooting Recorder Failure Symptoms ................................................................................................. 5-7 Table 5-7 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath... 8-20 Table 8-16 Procedure for Aligning Pen at Zero and Span ..... Volts........................................................................... and Milliamps Inputs .. 6-1 Table 6-2 Procedure for Replacing the Chart. 5-10 Table 5-10 Input Calibration Procedure Sequence ...................................................................................................................... 6-3 Table 6-4 Maximizing Pen Life ................................................................ 7-3 Table 7-3 Troubleshooting Recorder Failure Symptoms ................... 4-68 Table 4-34 Procedure for Starting Timer .............................................................. 5-6 Table 5-6 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Compensated Calibrator ........................................................ 7-8 Table 7-7 Procedure for Pen Alignment ........................................... 10-1 Table 10-2 Door Assembly Parts .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-1 Table 7-2 Observable Symptoms of Failure.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-5 Table 7-4 Troubleshooting Pen Trace Failure Symptoms............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-14 Table 8-10 Troubleshooting Erratic Pen Movement Symptoms ................................................................ 6-4 Table 7-1 Topics in Section 7 .............. 5-14 Table 6-1 Topics in Section 6 .................................... 9-5 Table 9-6 Procedure for Replacing the Printed Circuit Assembly ........................................................................................................... 8-21 Table 9-1 Topics in Section 9 ................. 9-1 Table 9-2 Procedure for Replacing Pen Arm 1 ...................... 9-2 Table 9-3 Procedure for Replacing Pen Arm 2 .................................................................................... 6-2 Table 6-3 Procedure for Replacing the Ink Cartridge .................. 8-12 Table 8-8 Troubleshooting Pen Trace Failure Symptoms............ 5-9 Table 5-9 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Calibrating Millivolts........ 5-4 Table 5-4 Disconnect the Field Wiring ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-13 Table 8-9 Troubleshooting Chart Rotation Failure Symptoms ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Table 4-33 Procedure for Resetting Totalizer............................... 8-18 Table 8-14 Troubleshooting Remote Switch (Digital Input) Function Failure Symptoms.......................................................................................................................................................................Product Manual xi ............................................................. 8-16 Table 8-12 Troubleshooting Relay Output Failure Symptoms. 8-19 Table 8-15 Troubleshooting Modbus Communications............................................................ 8-3 Table 8-3 Power-Up Diagnostic Tests .................................................................................................................... 9-4 Table 9-5 Procedure for Replacing the Chart Motor and Chart Hub ............ 5-13 Table 5-12 Procedure for Calibrating Current Output ................................................................................................ 8-4 Table 8-4 Procedure for Displaying the Results of Self-Diagnostics .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-1 Table 5-2 Voltage and Resistance Equivalents for 0% and 100% Range Values ........................................................................................................... 5-11 Table 5-11 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Current Proportional Output ........................................................................................................................ 9-11 Table 10-1 Topics in Section 10 ........... 8-17 Table 8-13 Troubleshooting External Alarm Function Failure Symptoms ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ........ 9-9 Table 9-9 Procedure for Replacing the Totalizer Battery ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-8 Table 5-8 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Calibrating RTD Inputs ..................................................................................... 8-5 Table 8-5 Error Messages ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-15 Table 8-11 Troubleshooting Keypad and/or Display Failure Symptoms .............................................................. 9-3 Table 9-4 Procedure for Replacing the Servo Assembly ......................................................

.......................................................................................................................................................... A-7 Table A-3 Coil Voltage vs................................. F-2 Table F-2 Procedure for Using Accutune for Duplex Control ........ F-3 xii DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder ............................................................... D-3 Table E-1 Prompt Hierarchy and Available Selections............................. Resistor Voltage Rating ..............................................................................C-7 Table D-1 Manual Tuning Procedure for Simplex Control.................................................................. 10-5 Table A-1 External Wiring ........................C-1 Table C-2 10-inch Dual Range Chart Part Numbers...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... A-8 Table B-1 Typical Reference Accuracy .............................. D-2 Table D-2 Manual Tuning Formulas.............................................................................................................................................................................................................B-2 Table C-1 10-inch Single Range Chart Part Numbers ..............................................................................................................Product Manual 1/99 .................DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 10-4 Basic Recorder Parts.....................................................................................................................E-11 Table F-1 Procedure for Starting Accutune II.....................................................................................E-8 Table E-2 Run/Monitor Functions ................................................ A-4 Table A-2 MOV Devices ..................................................................................................

........................... 4-5 Figure 4-3 Location of Switches and Relays.......... 3-18 Figure 3-5 Setting Chart Time to Time Index ................................................................................................. 2-19 Figure 2-10 Digital Input Wiring ......................................E-4 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder ...........Figures Figure 1-1 Guide to Manual’s Organization ........... 1-9 Figure 2-1 Overall Dimensions ......................... 5-9 Figure 5-5 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Millivolts................................................. 2-11 Figure 2-6 Recommended Wiring Routing ..................................... 4-53 Figure 4-6 Setting Chart Time to Time Index ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-3 Figure 3-2 Sample Chart for Single Pen Recorder .....................................Models Without CE Mark..................................................................... Volts................................................................................ 10-4 Figure 10-4 DR4300 Recorder (CE Mark) – Internal Cabling Diagram................................................................................................................................................. 5-5 Figure 5-2 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Compensated Calibrator ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-32 Figure 3-1 Location of Configuration and Input Switches ............................................................ 10-2 Figure 10-2 Chart Plate Assembly ...................... 2-17 Figure 2-9 Analog Input Wiring................................. 3-19 Figure 4-1 Operator Interface ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7 Figure 10-1 Door Assembly.......................................................................................... A-6 Figure A-2 Transient Suppression in Inductive Coils ........................................................................... 6-2 Figure 9-1 Connector Locations........................... 2-27 Figure 2-13 Open Collector Output Wiring ................................................. A-8 Figure A-4 DC Load Noise Suppression............................................................................................ 4-54 Figure 4-7 Operator Interface ............................. 5-13 Figure 6-1 Replacing the Chart and Ink Cartridge ..........................................................................................Models With CE Mark ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-30 Figure 2-15 Transmitter Power Out Wiring .. 2-7 Figure 2-4 Mounting Flush on a Surface of Panel or Wall (Rear View) .............................................................................................. 4-59 Figure 5-1 Location of the Input Connections on the Input Boards ................................................................................................................................................ 2-12 Figure 2-7 Power Wiring ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-7 Figure A-1 Transformer for Digital Equipment ................................................................................................................................................. 2-16 Figure 2-8 Power Wiring ............................... 4-51 Figure 4-5 Typical Step Test Chart Patterns ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-21 Figure 2-11 Communication Wiring .......................................................................................... 2-9 Figure 2-5 Recommended Wiring Routing ........................Product Manual xiii .................................................................................................................................................. 2-28 Figure 2-14 Current Output Wiring .............................................................. 10-3 Figure 10-3 Recorder Components .......................................................................................................................................... A-7 Figure A-3 Contact Noise Suppression ......................................................................................................................... D-4 Figure E-1 Ramp/Soak Profile Example .......................................................................................... 4-11 Figure 4-4 Basic Chart Plate Components .............................................................. and Milliamps Inputs....... A-9 Figure D-1 Pen Traces (Proportional Plus Manual Reset) .................................................................................................Models Without CE Mark .................................................................................... 5-10 Figure 5-6 Test Equipment Connections for Calibrating Current Output ............................................................................................ 5-7 Figure 5-3 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath . D-4 Figure D-2 Pen Traces (Proportional Plus Reset and/or Plus Rate) ...............Models With CE Mark.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-23 Figure 2-12 Relay Output Wiring ............................. 2-6 Figure 2-3 Mounting Flush in a New Panel Cutout (Rear View) ......................................................... 4-2 Figure 4-2 Prompt Hierarchy .......................................................................... 5-8 Figure 5-4 Calibration Set Up Diagram for RTD Inputs............................ 3-16 Figure 3-4 Typical Step Test Chart Patterns ..................... 3-4 Figure 3-3 Basic Chart Plate Components ................... 10-6 Figure 10-5 DR4300 Recorder (CE Non-Mark) – Internal Cabling Diagram...... 2-5 Figure 2-2 Plug Locations..................................................................................

Product Manual 1/99 .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder xiv DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

and 89/336/EEC. This option lets you display the real time value of the process variable for each pen channel. The input type and range are configurable. The basic recorder is also available in CE models DR4321 (one pen) and DR4322 (two pen).Overview 1. Each pen channel has its own printed circuit assembly (PCA). The recorder with display and keypad is also available in CE models DR4331 (one pen) and DR4332 (two pen). In the models having display and keypad the range can be expanded and compressed to meet specific measurement needs. or thermocouple.) Digital inputs Two digital inputs for each pen channel are available as an option.1 Introduction Function The DR4300 recorder is a one or two pen microprocessor-based circular chart recorder.Product Manual 1-1 . (The input filter for the models without a display is fixed at one second. allowing the channels to operate independently. the EMC Directive. and the special conditions for CE conformity in Section 2 of this manual. as well as other values. Chart speed and range are configurable. Conformity of this product with any other “CE Mark” Directive(s) shall not be assumed. These inputs can be used to trigger the switchover to a second control setpoint or a pre-configured constant output if an external event causes contact closure (sets the digital input to ON). convenient pen-drawn analog traces on preprinted 10 inch (250 mm) charts. their bias is zero. may invalidate this product’s conformity with the Low Voltage and EMC Directives. Deviation from the installation conditions specified in this manual. voltage. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . the digital inputs can be used to remotely reset the optional totalizer or limit controller. Both the chart and the pens are driven by stepper motors controlled by the microprocessor. Analog inputs The input for each pen channel can be one of any standard electrical signal: milliamp. In addition to generating pen-drawn chart traces. In addition. The basic DR4301 (one pen) and DR4302 (two pen) recorders provide reliable. Overview 1. millivolt. CE conformity (Europe) Indicated models of this product are in conformity with the protection requirements of the following European Council Directives: 73/23/EEC. RTD. The display and keypad also permit entry of input bias and filter values. the DR4311 (one pen) and DR4312 (two pen) models include a display and keypad. the Low Voltage Directive.

During configuration a “failsafe” value can be specified. soak timing is frozen. and deviation real time values if the recorder is equipped with optional outputs. A plus/minus deviation is configured for all soak segments. Whenever the plus/minus deviation is exceeded. or by an alarm. ON-OFF control can be performed using one relay (relay simplex control) or two relays (relay duplex control). setpoint. A setpoint and time is configured for each segment. Timer and totalizer options The recorder is available with timer and totalizer options. If the recorder has gone to failsafe operation. Analog output for control or retransmission Depending on the model ordered. At the end of the timeout period Relay 2 is energized. the control function goes to manual mode.or threedigit values. The program can be set up to include guaranteed soak segments.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Communications The Modbus communication option permits configuration of the unit and monitoring of process variables over a standard multi-drop serial communications link. Setpoint Programming Option The recorder is available with a Setpoint Program option. a 4 to 20 mA current output may be available for control or retransmission of a process variable ( “auxiliary output”). two for each pen channel. The upper display uses four characters to display the input value. 1-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .0% is configurable for the alarm setpoint. In automatic the control function works to maintain the process variable at the setpoint entered locally by the operator. The totalizer can be reset locally or remotely. the operator will be able to change the output value from the failsafe value specified during configuration. status and error messages flash on the lower display when necessary. the display can show output.Product Manual 1/99 . and remains energized until the timer is reset.0% to 100.or three-character label and four. This value is used as the output at power up and in case of input failure during automatic operation. In addition. Failsafe operation The control function can operate in automatic or manual mode.) In manual mode the operator enters the output locally. An adjustable hysteresis of 0. Display and keypad In addition to process variables. its displayed value can be scaled. These relays can be wired for Normally Open (NO) and Normally Closed (NC) terminals. The lower display shows other parameters using a two. The unit can be configured to display elapsed time or time remaining. This feature allows configuration of up to four setpoint programs using a total of twenty-four ramp and soak segments. Relay outputs for control and alarms The models with display and keypad are available with output relays. (When the unit goes to failsafe. remotely. The timer can be started locally. Two alarm setpoints can be configured for each alarm relay. Any relay not used for control is available for alarming.

see 4. and to select set up parameters and their values during configuration. then setting the switches as shown in the table. When the unit is in configuration mode.or surface-mounted. The display and keypad are used to configure models with these options. the other for input definition. The operator can be locked out from making configuration changes. Construction All DR4300 recorders are housed in a rugged molded case which can be panel-. For more information about the operator interface on models having a display and keypad. selecting the appropriate combination of range. Configuration The models without a display are configured with two switchbanks: one for configuration. Problems are reported by error messages on the display when present.Overview The six keys are used to select the real time value to be displayed. protecting them from dirt. A supplementary external keypad is also available.Product Manual 1-3 . 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Configuration is a simple matter of consulting a table in this manual. pipe. chart speed. gasketed door protects internal components from harsh environments while allowing easy access to the chart. The display and keypad are behind the door. The models with display also use a switchbank to define the type of input to be expected by the hardware. Designate site-specific values by selecting them from a list of choices. and grouped by function. An acrylic-windowed. set up parameters are displayed. engineering unit. and input type.2. Input parameters used by the software are configured using the display and keypad. or entering them as numeric values. An LED in the models without a display lights if the unit fails a self-diagnostic. Self-diagnostics All DR4300 recorders run self-diagnostics at power up and in the background during normal operation.

_ _ _ _ _ ._ _ _ _ . Appended to this key number are characters that identify the features in various categories.Product Manual 1/99 . With CE Mark) Two Pen Recorder (With Display. The meaning of the characters in each category is presented in a table identified below. With CE Mark) Restricted availability designations d = Not available with Table I selection XX0X. e = Not available with Table I selection XXX0. h = Not available with Table I selections FXXX.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 1. Model number format The basic model number consists of a key number. The meaning of each letter is provided at the bottom of this page. XFXX. A star (“) in the Availability column means unrestricted availability of the feature for that model. XGXX. A letter in the Availability column denotes restricted availability. Key Number Table I Table II Table III Table IV Table V Table VI DR43_ _ . The Notes referred to in the tables are also at the end of the sub-section. GXXX. DR4301 DR4302 DR4311 DR4312 DR4321 DR4322 DR4331 DR4332 1-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . With CE Mark) One Pen Recorder (With Display. f = Not available with Table I selection 0XXX.000 Key numbers The base model numbers for the DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder are: One Pen Recorder (Basic Recorder Without Display) Two Pen Recorder (Basic Recorder Without Display) One Pen Recorder (With Display) Two Pen Recorder (With Display) One Pen Recorder (Basic Recorder Without Display._ _ _ _ . With CE Mark) Two Pen Recorder (Basic Recorder Without Display. k = Not available with Table I selection X0XX. Note that not all options are available with all recorders.2 Model Number Breakdown Introduction The model number breakdown is presented in the tables that follow. j = Not available with Table I selection 0XXX. Check the “Availability” column for each model._ _ ._ _ _ _ . g = Not available with Table I selection 0000.

Overview Model Number Table I . 4301 4321 Pen One None 2 Outputs (Alarm/On-Off Control) 1 PID Control with Accutune II (see Note 1) Availability 4302 4322 4311 4331 4312 4332 0___ 2___ 3___ 4___ 5___ (see Note 4) “ “ “ d d d d d d d “ d d d d d d d 1 PID Control/Setpoint Program/Timer (see Note 1) 2 Outputs (Alarm 1 and Timer) 4 to 20 mA Retransmission Output FM Approved Limit Control FM Approved Limt Control/Timer Output Pen Two None 2 Outputs (Alarm/On-Off Control) 1 PID Control with Accutune II (see Note 1) A___ F___ G___ _0__ _2__ _3 _ _ _4__ _5__ (see Note 4) “ “ “ “ e e e e e e e 1 PID Control/Setpoint Program/Timer (see Note 1) 2 Outputs (Alarm 1 and Timer) 4 to 20 mA Retransmission Output FM Approved Limit Control FM Approved Limt Control/Timer Output Output Type Pen 1 None Electromechanical Relay Solid State Relay Open Collector Output Type Pen 2 None Electromechanical Relay Solid State Relay Open Collector _A__ _F__ _G__ __0_ __E_ __S_ __T_ “ “ “ j j j “ j j j ___0 ___E ___S ___T “ “ “ “ k k k 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .OUTPUT Description Model No.Product Manual 1-5 .

INSTRUMENT OPTIONS Description Model No. 4301 4321 No Digital Inputs Digital Inputs None No Totalizer Function Totalizer 0___ “ Availability 4302 4322 “ 4311 4331 “ f “ “ “ “ “ “ h “ “ “ 4312 4332 “ g “ “ h “ (See Note 3) D___ _0__ __0_ __T_ ___0 Future 1-6 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . 4301 4321 Door Options Gray Door Blue Door Gray Door with External Keypad Blue Door with External Keypad Standard Latch Door Lock Instrument Power/Transmitter Power Universal Recorder Power 24 Vdc Recorder Power Universal Power +24 Vdc Transmitter Power Communications None RS485 Modbus RTU Communication (see Note 5) ___0_ ___C_ ____0 “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ __1__ __2__ __3__ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ G____ B____ H____ C____ _0___ _K___ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ Availability 4302 4322 4311 4331 4312 4332 Future Model Number Table III .PEN 1 OPTIONS Description Model No.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Model Number Table II .Product Manual 1/99 .

only one discrete output is available for an alarm. If ON-OFF or time-proportioned simplex control. or only one pen of a DR4302 or DR4322 can be on the network. NOTE 3: Digital Inputs are only available when ordering outputs in Table I. Only one DR4301 or DR4321 instrument. Time-proportioned duplex control requires the use of both outputs and therefore no relay outputs are available for alarms on that pen channel. NOTE 5: On key numbers DR4301. DR4302. You must specify the type of alarm outputs required (i.Product Manual 1-7 .Overview Model Number Table IV .PEN 2 OPTIONS Description Model No. NOTE 4: 4 to 20 mA Retransmission Output includes two outputs per pen for alarms. and DR4322 the communication address is fixed.e. SS Relay. otherwise communication conflicts will exist. 4301 4321 No Approvals UL Listing CSA Certification UL and CSA Approved No Certificate Certificate of Conformance Certificate of Calibration 0_ U_ C_ B_ _0 _1 “ “ “ “ “ “ “ Availability 4302 4322 “ “ “ “ “ “ “ 4311 4331 “ “ “ “ “ “ “ 4312 4332 “ “ “ “ “ “ “ (See Note 2) _2 NOTE 1: PID control options include current output plus two discrete outputs for alarms. NOTE 2: Customer must supply the input actuation and range information for each input in the Free Form section of the order to have the unit supplied with a Certificate of Calibration. the display assembly is required to change it.. or current/time duplex or time/current duplex output is used. DR4321. Open Collector Outputs). Accutune II tuning is a standard feature with PID control options.APPROVALS/CERTIFICATES Description Model No. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Relay. 4301 4321 No Digital Inputs Digital Inputs None No Totalizer Function Totalizer 0___ “ Availability 4302 4322 “ 4311 4331 “ 4312 4332 “ g “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ h “ “ “ “ (See Note 3) D___ _0__ __0_ __T_ ___0 Future Model Number Table V .

the information in the section applies to all models. 1-8 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . set up. DR4321.Product Manual 1/99 . To see which sections apply to your recorder.3 About This Manual All models described This manual contains instructions for installation. operation. and repair of all recorder models listed in 1. troubleshooting. Unless a section’s title refers to recorders “without display” or “with display”. DR4302. DR4331. and DR4332 Some sections in the manual apply to all models. see Figure 1-1. and DR4322 • enhanced version with display: DR4311. while others contain information specific to one of these two categories. DR4312.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 1. The models fall into two broad categories: • basic version without display: DR4301.2. startup.

Using Figure 1-1 Guide to Manual’s Organization 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder without Display SECTION 8 .Overview SECTION 2 . Startup. and Operation of Recorder with Display SECTION 5 .Configuration.Routine Maintenance Trouble? SECTION 7 .Replacing Hardware Assemblies SECTION 10 .Configuration.Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display SECTION 6 .Installation SECTION 3 .Parts List Options APPENDIX E . Startup. and Operation of Recorder without Display SECTION 4 .Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming and Operation Accutune II 24209 APPENDIX F .Product Manual 1-9 .Overview SECTION 1 .Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display SECTION 9 .

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 1-10 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 1/99 .

See Page 2-1 2-5 2-6 2-10 2-14 2-24 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Inspect the unit for any obvious shipping damage and report any damage due to transit to the carrier. check the model number interpretation in Section 1. and become familiar with your model selections. • Make sure a bag containing mounting hardware is included in the carton with the recorder. What’s in this section? Table 2-1 lists the topics in this section.3 Mounting Methods 2.6 Output Wiring Pre-installation information If the recorder has not been removed from its shipping carton. inspect the carton for damage and remove the recorder.Product Manual 2-1 . then proceed with installation.2 Mounting Considerations and Overall Dimensions 2. • Check that the model number shown on the chart plate agrees with what you have ordered.1 Overview Introduction Installation of the DR4300 recorder consists of mounting and wiring the recorder according to the instructions given in this section. Installation 2.Installation 2. Table 2-1 Topics in Section 2 Topic 2.1 Overview 2.5 Input Wiring 2.4 Wiring Prerequisites 2. Read the pre-installation information below.

J. R. 100 ohms (low)*. T. E. 1-5 Vdc. 2-10 Vdc Digital: +24 Vdc source for external dry contacts or isolated solid state contacts *IEC Alpha = 0. mA dc: 250 ohms Vdc: 200K ohms RTD: 13. 0-2 Vdc. Table 2-2 Operating Limits and Condensed Specifications Condition Accuracy Ambient Temperature Relative Humidity Vibration Frequency Acceleration Mechanical Shock Acceleration Duration Mounting Position from Vertical Tilted Forward Tilted Backward Tilted to side (±) Power Voltage (ac/dc) See Appendix B 32 to 131°F (0 to 55°C) 5 to 90% RH at 40°C (104°F) 0 to 200 Hz 0. 0-1 Vdc.Product Manual 1/99 . 0-10 Vdc. 2-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . 0-10 mV dc. 0-200 mV dc. K (low).3K ohms All others: 10 Megohms Span Step Response Time 7 seconds maximum Reproducibility Sampling Rate 0. K. J (low).00391 Minimum Input Span Input Impedance Range is fully configurable within span limitation of the sensing element. E (low). NicrosilNisil. Ni-Ni Moly. 100 ohms** Linear: 4-20 mA dc. T (low).DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Operating limits We recommend that you review and adhere to the operating limits listed in Table 2-2 when you install your recorder. 0-100 mV dc. 0-5 Vdc.5 g 5g 30 ms Specifications 5° 90° 20° 100 to 240 Vac or 20 to 27 Vac/Vdc 49 to 61 Hz 20 Watts Maximum Frequency (Hz) Power Consumption Type of Actuations Thermocouple: B. W5W26 RTD: Platinum 100 ohms*.1 percent of span Input sampled 3 times per second Table 2-2 continued on next page. 0-20 mA dc.00385 **Alpha = 0. S.

Industrial Equipment (EN50082-2.5A @ 240 Vac or 30 Vdc. and as direct or reverse action. Resolution: 11 bits for 4 to 21 mA Accuracy: 0. Group 1.Installation Table 2-2 Operating Limits and Condensed Specifications.or surface-mounted Category II: Energy-consuming Equipment Supplied from the Fixed Installation.1% F.Product Manual 2-3 ./ °C Load Resistance: 0 to 600 ohms SPDT contacts.5 % full scale Temperature Stability: 0. Motor: 1/6 H. Resistive Load: 5A @ 120 Vac or 2.P. Disposable fiber-tip ink cartridge. AC Main to Inputs/Outputs Input to Input Input to Output (except Digital Input to Current Output) 250Vac 250Vac 250Vac 250Vac AC Main to Transmitter Power Options Current Output (Isolated) Range can be set anywhere between 4 and 21 mA. line length per cartridge more than 1000 ft (305 m) One Pen: Purple Two Pen: Purple (pen 1) and red (pen 2) Note: Pen 1 (purple) is referenced to the chart time line. Local Level Appliances.32-inch (262 mm) diameter chart with standard preprinted markings and a calibrated width of 4 inches (100 mm). Inductive Load: 50 VA @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac. pipe. Internally socketed. Screw terminals (2 piece) Chart Wiring Connections Color Weight Mounting Installation Category (Overvoltage Category) Pollution Degree EMC Classification Dielectric Insulation Case: Black Door (standard): Caribbean blue or gray 12 lbs (5. Molded. Immunity). foamed-Noryl with gasketed door to meet NEMA 3 enclosure requirements. 10. Electromechanical Relay Output 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . and Industrial Control Equipment (EN61010-1). Class A: ISM Equipment (EN55011.4 kg) Panel-. emissions). Pollution Degree 2: Normally Non-conductive Pollution with Occasional Conductivity Caused by Condensation (Ref. Continued Condition Input Filter Case Pen Specifications Analog with time constant of 3 seconds and digital with time constant of 0 to 120 with display.S. IEC 664-1).

configurable for models with display. Continued Condition Solid State Relay Output Specifications SPST solid state contacts consisting of a triac NO output. Internally socketed. multidrop +24 Vdc source for external dry contacts or isolated solid state contacts for either of the two inputs.000 ft (1. 24Vdc.219 m) maximum Link Characteristics: Two-wire. Baud Rate: 19. fixed at 9. Socketed jumper assembly replaces relay.Product Manual 1/99 . Resistive Load: 1.600 for models without display Protocol: Modbus Length of Link: 4.200 maximum. but not from each other. On contact closure the recorder will response according to how each digital input is configured.5 A @ 55 °C for 120 Vac or 240 Vac.0 A @ 25 °C for 120 Vac or 240 Vac.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 2-2 Operating Limits and Condensed Specifications. 0. 50mA maximum Modbus Communication Digital Inputs (Supply common with current output) Transmitter Power 2-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Opening contact causes return to previous state. Inductive Load: 50 VA @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac. Open Collector Output Maximum Sink Current: 20 mA Internally powered @ 30 Vdc Opto-isolated from all other circuits except current output.

Product Manual 2-5 .6 369.125 23 0.5 355.6 14.5 0.1 Rear View 24210 Figure 2-1 Overall Dimensions 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . A kit for mounting the unit on a pipe is available (see Section 10 Parts List).3 7. Dimensions: Millimetres Inches Left Side View Max.6 Bottom View Front View 355.7 163.4 Panel Cutout 322.2 6.0 320.6 14.70 Surface Mounting 181.56 12.Installation 2.6 320.56 12.5 12.8 196.6 17.2 Mounting Considerations and Overall Dimensions Physical considerations The recorder can be mounted flush in a panel or on the surface of a panel or wall using the mounting kit supplied with the recorder.2 7.3 1.0 322.5 12. Adequate access space must be available at the back of the panel for installation and servicing. Overall dimensions The overall dimensions and panel cutout requirements for mounting the recorder are shown in Figure 2-1.9 41.70 147.8 5.6 thickness 1.6 14. panel 28.

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 2.3.2) and on the surface of a wall or panel (see 2.3.3).Product Manual 1/99 . A kit for mounting the unit on a pipe is available (see Section 10 Parts List). How to remove knockouts for conduits Before you mount the recorder. refer to Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6.1 Introduction Overview This subsection provides instructions for mounting the recorder flush in a panel (see 2.3. To see recommended use of conduits for various types of wiring. Side View Bottom View 24211 Figure 2-2 Plug Locations 2-6 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .3 Mounting Methods 2.7 mm) conduits. Refer to Figure 2-2 for plug locations. remove the appropriate plugs in the bottom and/or sides of the recorder case for wire entry via 1/2" (12.

make a square cutout in the panel.060 inches by 12. Cutout dimensions should be 12. slide each bracket against the back of the panel and tighten the screws.56 ±1.56 ±1.Installation 2. Orient the recorder case properly and slide it into the cutout from the front of the panel.2 Mounting Flush in Panel (New Panel Cutout) Procedure Refer to Figure 2-3 and follow the procedure in Table 2-3 to make a new cutout in a panel and mount your recorder in the cutout. attach a mounting bracket to each side of the recorder case using a 1/4-20 x 1/2 inch hex screw for each bracket (mounting hardware supplied with recorder).060 inches (322.3. While holding the recorder firmly against the panel. Table 2-3 Mounting Flush in a New Panel Cutout Step 1 Action At the appropriate location. Support the recorder as shown in Steps 3 and 4.52 by 322.Product Manual 2-7 .52 millimeters). 1/4-20 x 1/2 inch and washer 21406 Figure 2-3 Mounting Flush in a New Panel Cutout (Rear View) 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . See Figure 2-3. From the back of the panel. Refer to Figure 2-3. 2 3 4 Hex screw. Leave the screws slightly loose so you can adjust the brackets.7 ±0.7 ±0.

3. Insert the screws for the support hook into the panel. fasten the support hook into the recess at the back of the recorder case as shown in Figure 2-4. Leave the screws slightly loose so as to permit some adjustments of the brackets. Remove the recorder from the panel and drill the other two holes. make sure that the recorder is aligned vertically. drill a hole in the front of the panel for the eye of the support hook. as shown by the hole pattern in Figure 2-4. Hang the recorder support hook on the screw. Tighten the two hex screws that attach the brackets to the case. attach a mounting bracket to each side of the case. Make sure that the locations for the other two holes (marked in Step 3) are correct.Product Manual 1/99 . If not. On the panel. ATTENTION Three (3) screws must be supplied by the user for attaching the mounting hardware (brackets and support hook) to panel or wall.3 Mounting on Surface (of Panel or Wall) Procedure Refer to Figure 2-4 and follow the procedure in Table 2-4 to mount your recorder on a surface (panel or wall). mark the locations for the three holes. allowing the screw head to protrude approximately 5/16-inch. and use the brackets as templates to mark the proper locations. Using 1/4-20 x 1/2-inch hex screws and lockwashers. Using a drill of appropriate size for user-supplied screws. Table 2-4 Mounting Flush on a Surface (of Panel or Wall) Step 1 2 Action Using two flat-head 10-32 x 1/4-inch screws supplied with the recorder.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 2. 3 4 5 6 7 8 2-8 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Hang the recorder on the screw by the support hook and insert the other two usersupplied screws through the brackets into the panel.

550 196.430 18.03 0.710 21409 Figure 2-4 Mounting Flush on a Surface of Panel or Wall (Rear View) 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .22 7.725 181.6 14. all other mounting hardware Support is supplied with recorder.32 6.Product Manual 2-9 .36 7.Installation Hole Pattern Reference: millimeters inches NOTE: These screws must be supplied by user. hook 369.14 163.

see Appendix A .Product Manual 1/99 .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 2. Digital equipment is especially sensitive to the effects of electrical noise. For additional noise information. Control. Taking electrical noise precautions Electrical noise is composed of unabated electrical signals which produce undesirable effects in measurement and control circuits. Cable/conduit entry fittings shall effectively terminate the cable shield connecting the shield to the enclosure conductive coating. Your recorder has built-in circuits to reduce the effect of electrical noise from various sources. Appropriate suppression devices are commercially available. you may want to add suppression devices at the external source. Part 1: General Requirements. Electrical considerations ! The recorder is considered “rack and panel mounted equipment” per EN 61010-1.How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments. 2-10 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .4 Wiring Prerequisites Wiring should be performed by qualified personnel. and Laboratory Use. Recorder grounding PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND) Grounding of this recorder shall be in accordance with national and local electrical codes. CE conformity special conditions (Europe) Shielded cables with a drain wire are required for all input and output cables. If there is a need to further reduce these effects: • Separate External Wiring—Separate connecting wires into bundles (see Table 2-5) and route the individual bundles through separate conduits or metal trays. Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement. 11 (4 mm2) braided copper conductor is recommended. The shielded cable shield shall not extend into the instrument closure. • Use Suppression Devices—For additional noise protection. All instrument shielded cable drain wires must be connected to a low impedance earth ground at the entry fitting. connection of the recorder terminal (located in the rear of the case) to a local earth (ground) using a No. NOISELESS (CLEAN) EARTH (GROUND) To minimize electrical noise and transients that may adversely affect the recorder.

C.Installation Recommended wiring routing The case is equipped with numerous knock-outs (plugs) for wiring conduits (see Figure 2-2).Product Manual 2-11 . refer to Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6. Recommended Wiring Locations for Models J3 Communications Printed Circuit Board Pen 2 Main Printed Circuit Board TB1 TB2 without CE Mark RS485/422 Communications 24V Power Supply Pen 1 Main Printed Circuit Board TB1 TB2 Digital Input Board TB5 L N P3D TB3 Digital Input Board TB5 P3D TB4 TB4 TB3 Inputs 1 and 2 24818 Relay/Alarm Outputs A. Mains (Integral wiring to TB1) Digital Inputs 1 and 2 Current Outputs 1 and 2 and 24VPower Supply Figure 2-5 Recommended Wiring Routing . To see recommended use of these points of entry for various types of wiring.Models Without CE Mark 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

C.Product Manual 1/99 .Models With CE Mark 2-12 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Recommended Wiring Locations for CE Mark Models J3 Communications Printed Circuit Board Pen 2 Main Printed Circuit Board TB2 Pen 1 Main Printed Circuit Board TB2 RS485/422 Communications 24V Power Supply TB1 TB1 Digital Input Board P3D TB5 Relay/Alarm Outputs TB4 TB3 Digital Input Board P3D TB5 TB4 TB3 AC Filter Assembly 24819 Inputs 1 and 2 A. A separate braided copper shield shall be used to connect on rear of case to chassis ground Figure 2-6 Recommended Wiring Routing . Mains and Ground Wire 1 Current Outputs 1 and 2 and 24VPower Supply Digital Inputs 1 and 2 1 A braided Copper shield shall be connected to ground (green screw on the filter assembly).

Table 2-6 Wiring Illustrations Wiring Requirements Power Wiring . such as: • • • • • Input signal wire (thermocouple.Models With CE Mark Analog Input Wiring Digital Input Wiring Communication Wiring Relay Output Wiring Open Collector Relay Output Wiring Current Output Wiring Transmitter Power Out Wiring Figure Figure 2-7 Figure 2-8 Figure 2-9 Figure 2-10 Figure 2-11 Figure 2-12 Figure 2-13 Figure 2-14 Figure 2-15 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Do not bundle together wires from different categories. 4 to 20 mA. Table 2-5 shows which wire functions may usually be bundled together. Table 2-5 Wiring Bundling Categories Category 1 • • • • 2 Line power wiring Earth ground wiring Control relay output wiring Line voltage alarm wiring Wire Functions Analog signal wire.Models Without CE Mark Power Wiring . refer to the model number interpretation in Section 1 .Product Manual 2-13 . The model number of the recorder can be found on the chart plate. Using the information contained in the model number.Installation Wire bundling recommendations Bundling together the wrong wires can adversely affect the recorder’s performance. select the appropriate wiring diagrams from the figures listed in Table 2-6 and wire the recorder accordingly.Overview.) 4-20 mA output signal wiring Digital input wiring Communication wiring Transmitter power out wiring Low voltage alarm relay output wiring Low voltage wiring to solid state type control circuits 3 • • Wiring diagrams To determine the appropriate diagrams for wiring your recorder. etc.

2-14 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . • See Figure 2-7 for models without CE Mark. It is the user’s responsibility to provide a switch and non-time delay (North America). and the optional communication link. The switch or circuit-breaker shall be located in close proximity to the recorder. • See Figure 2-8 for models with CE Mark. quick-acting.Product Manual 1/99 . high breaking capacity.5 Input Wiring Introduction This section describes procedures for wiring power.5. ! WARNING Be sure that the line voltage is OFF before connecting the power wires to the recorder. Type F. (See Model Number in Section 1 Overview. (Europe) 1/2 A. analog inputs. optional digital inputs. 250 V fuse(s) or circuitbreaker as part of the installation. The switch or circuit-breaker shall be marked as the disconnecting device for the recorder.1 Power Wiring Introduction Recorder models are available for use with 100 to 240 Vac or 20 to 27 Vdc power. Failure to observe this precaution can result in serious personal injury or death.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 2. ! CAUTION This equipment is suitable for connection to 100 to 240 Vac (49 to 61 Hz) or 20 to 27 Vac/Vdc power supply mains. 2. within easy reach of the operator.) Procedure The procedure to connect power wiring is in Table 2-7.

Installation Table 2-7 Procedure for Power Wiring Models Step 1 2 Action Open the recorder door. Strip 1/4-inch maximum of insulation from the end of each wire and form end to fit under a screw connection. 3 4 Run the power wires separately through the conduit hole indicated in Figure 2-5 or Figure 2-6. In all models. be sure that you install the power wires into the correct screw terminals as shown in Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8. Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out. On CE Mark and UL models the connection between the terminal block at the bottom of the case and the PCA is also made at the factory. ATTENTION: To avoid damaging the recorder. Refer to Appendix A for additional information concerning noise interference prevention. • See Figure 2-8 for models with CE Mark. you only have to connect power to a single terminal block.Product Manual 2-15 . Do not bundle any low level signal wires with the power wires. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . 5 6 Tighten the screws to secure the wires. Locate the power terminal block for your recorder model. ! WARNING Input line voltage may be present on the instrument ground plane if earth ground is not attached. Dress the wires with as much slack as possible. Note that the power connection between the boards on two-pen models is made at the factory. Refer to Table 2-5 for permissible wire bundling. • See Figure 2-7 for models without CE Mark.

high breaking capacity.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Main PCA Pen 2 Main PCA Pen 1 7 TB2 7 TB2 TB1 4 TB1 5 L N TB6 2 24821 3 1 It is the user’s responsibility to provide a switch and non-time delay (North America). 250 V fuse(s) or circuit-breaker as part of the installation. 1 2 PROTECTIVE EARTH (Ground): Grounding of this recorder shall be in accordance with National and Local electrical codes.Product Manual 1/99 . if installed. (Europe) 1/2 A. quick-acting. L2/N L1/H 4 For 2 Pen Recorder/Controller. 5 Wire AC Power to this connector if installed.Models Without CE Mark 2-16 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Type F. using a No. connect AC power to TB1 of Pen 2 PCA. is required. Figure 2-7 Power Wiring . Supply connections must be made at TB6. 3 NOISELESS (Clean) EARTH (Ground): To minimize electrical noise and transients that may adversely 100 to 240 Vac affect the recorder. connection of the recorder terminal (located in the rear of the case) to a local earth (ground). 11 (4 mm2) braided copper conductor.

high breaking capacity. Type F. quick-acting. 2 PROTECTIVE EARTH (Ground): Grounding of this recorder shall be in accordance with National and Local electrical codes. using a No. 11 (4 mm2) braided copper conductor.Product Manual 2-17 .Models With CE Mark 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . 3 NOISELESS (Clean) EARTH (Ground): To minimize electrical noise and transients that may adversely affect the recorder. is required. 2 1 L1/H L2/N 100 to 240 Vac Figure 2-8 Power Wiring . (Europe) 1/2 A. connection of the recorder terminal (located in the rear of the case) to a local earth (ground). 250 V fuse(s) or circuit-breaker as part of the installation.Installation Main PCA Pen 2 Main PCA Pen 1 7 TB2 TB1 TB1 7 TB2 L N 24820 Ground Screw L N 2 3 1 It is the user’s responsibility to provide a switch and non-time delay (North America).

Insert the wires under the appropriate screws for the applicable input type. Tighten the screws to secure the wires. Procedure Refer to Figure 2-9 while following the procedure in Table 2-8 to install analog input wiring. repeat Steps 3 through 6 to wire the input for the second pen channel to TB2 on the PCA on the left inside of the recorder. Each input can be wired for thermocouple. Startup. The input for pen channel 2 is wired to TB2 on the PCA on the left.2 Analog Input Wiring Introduction The input for pen channel 1 is wired to TB2 on the printed circuit assembly (PCA) on the right (when facing recorder).DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 2. Open the recorder door. See Section 3 – Configuration. 7 2-18 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .5. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Turn off the power to the recorder. mV. and Operation of Recorder Without Display or Section 4 – Configuration. If the recorder has two pens. Run the input wires through the appropriate conduit hole (see Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6). and Operation of Recorder With Display. be sure that you install the power wires into the correct screw terminals as shown in Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8. or Volt actuations. See Figure 2-9 for specific input actuation wiring. ATTENTION Make sure you have configured the recorder to accept the desired input type.Product Manual 1/99 . mA. Locate terminal block TB2 on the right edge of the printed circuit assembly for pen 1 (refer to Figure 2-9). Startup. RTD. Table 2-8 Analog Input Wiring Step Action ATTENTION To avoid damaging the recorder. Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out. DO NOT bundle them with the power wires. Strip 1/4-inch maximum of insulation from the end of each wire and form end to fit under the screw terminal on the removable connection block.

Red – R RTD TB2 + Be sure that thermocouple extension wire matches thermocouple type RTD – R Standard used as color reference ANSI MC96. mV or Volt TB2 + mA.1 mA.Red + Black .Red + Blue .Red + Purple .Installation Main PCA Pen 2 Main PCA Pen 1 7 7 TB2 TB1 TB1 TB2 + White J K T R S E B N •- Red + Yellow .Red + Orange . mV or Volt source • 100 ohm maximum lead resistance • Keep resistance of all wires equal • Use 18 gauge copper wire for lengths up to 150 feet. The single wire is usually the positive connection – R Figure 2-9 Analog Input Wiring 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . • For two wire RTD jumper terminal negative (-) to R. • Many 3-wire RTDs use color coded wires.Red + Gray .Red + Black 24086 Thermocouple + T/C TB2 . One wire is a different color than the other two.Product Manual 2-19 .

Table 2-9 Digital Input Wiring Step Action ATTENTION To avoid damaging the recorder. Strip 1/4-inch maximum of insulation from the end of each wire and form end to fit under a screw connection. its PCA is on the left. P3D. The PCA on the right inside the recorder is for pen 1. Tighten the screws to secure the wires. DO NOT bundle them with the power wires.3 Digital Inputs (Optional) Introduction If the recorder hardware supports optional digital inputs. 3 4 5 6 2-20 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . the inputs are wired to the terminal block on the digital input board mounted on stand-offs on the printed circuit assembly for the pen channel.Product Manual 1/99 .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 2. Locate the terminal block. on the optional digital input printed circuit assembly mounted on stand-offs above the printed circuit assembly (PCA) for the pen channel. Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out. repeat Steps 2 through 5 to wire the input for the second pen channel.) Run the input wires through the appropriate conduit hole (see Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6). If the recorder has two pens. be sure that you install the power wires into the correct screw terminals as shown in Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8. Procedure Refer to Figure 2-10 while following the procedure in Table 2-9 to install digital input wiring. Insert the wires under the appropriate screws for the input number (labeled on assembly).5. (See Figure 2-10. if there is a second pen. 1 2 Open the recorder door.

Product Manual 2-21 .Installation Main PCA Pen 2 Main PCA Pen 1 7 TB2 TB1 TB1 7 TB2 Digital Input PCA J9 24142 Digital Input Switch #1 Digital Input Switch #2 P3D Connect shield to ground at one end only Switch Common Figure 2-10 Digital Input Wiring 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 2.) Procedure Refer to Figure 2-11 while following the procedure in Table 2-10 to install communication wiring. Locate the terminal block on the optional communication printed circuit assembly in the upper left corner of the case. Strip 1/4-inch maximum of insulation from the end of each wire and form end to fit under a screw connection. baud rate. and there is no transmitter delay. Insert the wires under the appropriate screws (labeled on assembly). For models without a display the address of pen 1 is fixed at 127. Tighten the screws to secure the wires. Pen channel 2. Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out. Table 2-10 Communication Wiring Step Action ATTENTION To avoid damaging the recorder.Product Manual 1/99 . DO NOT bundle them with the power wires. be sure that you install the power wires into the correct screw terminals as shown in Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8.4 Communication (Optional) Introduction If the recorder hardware supports optional Modbus RTU communication. ATTENTION Network address. Only one pen channel with the fixed address of 127 can be on the network. if present in the recorder.5. (See Figure 2-11.) Run the communication wires through the appropriate conduit hole (see Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6). cannot communicate. 1 2 3 4 5 Open the recorder door. 2-22 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . the communication link is wired to the terminal block on the communication board in the upper left corner of the case. and transmitter delay are configurable for models with a display (see Section 4). (Display is required to configure a unique address for the second pen to communicate. baud rate is fixed at 9600.

NOTE: The shield of the communication cable is connected to ground at the recorder end. and should not extend into the recorder enclosure.Installation Communication PCA 7 7 TB2 TB1 TB1 TB2 Main PCA Pen 1 Main PCA Pen 2 24822 Communications master J3 _ + See Note Tx+/ Rx+ SHLD 120 Ohm Resistor Tx–/ Rx– Place 120 Ohm Resistor on last device. between Tx+/Rx+ and Tx–/Rx–. To other communications instruments (Maximum 15) Optional communication Figure 2-11 Communication Wiring 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 2-23 .

and each can use a different output algorithm. To see which terminals are used for what output function.Product Manual 1/99 . (The output algorithm is set with the control set up group “OUTALG” parameter. Each pen channel is configured separately.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 2.) Table 2-11 Output Terminal Use for Output Algorithm and Option Combinations Terminal Function OUTALG value Current Out (TB5) auxilary output* auxilary output* auxilary output* control control (cool) control (heat) Relay 1 (TB4) alarm 1 control control 1 (heat) alarm 1 control (heat) control (cool) Relay 2 (TB3) alarm 2 or timer* alarm 2 or timer* control 2 (cool) alarm 2 or timer* alarm 2 or timer* alarm 2 or timer* NONE RLY RLYD CUR CurT Tcur * option 2-24 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . refer to Table 2-11.6 Output Wiring ATTENTION The recorder is available with several options and multiple output algorithms. This table applies to all control types. The wiring diagrams in this subsection show how to wire the terminals. Output terminal use depends on which output algorithm and options are used.

Product Manual 2-25 .6. depending on configuration). ATTENTION The DR4300 is available as a limit controller. Startup. and 2 and 1 for NC contacts) is used for limit control. and low voltage control/alarm circuits) shall be separated from HAZARDOUS LIVE (>30 Vac.1 Discrete Outputs Introduction Each pen channel in the recorder models having display and keypad can be equipped with two optional discrete outputs. depending on the configuration as described in Section 4 – Configuration. and Operation of Recorder with Display. the controller goes to the limit state: Relay 1 is de-energized. current output. When the recorder detects that the input has exceeded the limit (or fallen below the limit.Installation 2.4 Vpeak or 60 Vdc) wiring per Table 2-5. 42. Insulation of output wires The insulation of wires connected to the relay output terminals shall be rated for the highest voltage involved. Three types of discrete outputs are available: • electromechanical relay • solid state relay • open collector output ATTENTION The electromechanical relays on the printed circuit assembly (PCA) for each pen channel can be wired for Normally Open (NO) and Normally Closed (NC) operation. Extra Low Voltage (ELV) wiring (input. In a limit controller each pen channel’s printed circuit assembly Relay 1 (TB4 terminals 3 and 2 for NO contacts. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . These outputs can be used for control or alarming.

*TB3 is output 2. Refer to Figure 2-13 for wiring open collector outputs. TB4 is output 1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Turn off the power to the recorder. Locate terminal blocks TB3* and TB4* on the bottom right edge of the printed circuit assembly (PCA) for pen 1 or pen 2. Insert the wires under the appropriate screws for the applicable relay output as shown in the figures.1 or 2 Pen Models Step Action ATTENTION To avoid damaging the recorder. Table 2-12 Relay Output Wiring . Open the recorder door. DO NOT bundle them with input wires. Strip 1/4-inch maximum of insulation from the end of each wire and form end to fit under a screw connection. Refer to Table 2-11 to see the output function of each terminal with the available output algorithms and options. Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out. Tighten the screws to secure the wires.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Procedure Follow the procedure in Table 2-12 to wire the discrete outputs. Refer to Figure 2-12 for wiring electromechanical and solid state relays.Product Manual 1/99 . Run the output wires through the appropriate conduit hole (see Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6). 2-26 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . be sure that you install the power wires into the correct screw terminals as shown in Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8.

there may be a residual voltage across both ends of the load even if the relay is turned off. Size fuses accordingly.Product Manual 2-27 . Figure 2-12 Relay Output Wiring 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .5 Amps. The total current through the resistor and the load current must exceed 20 mA. 2 Solid State relays are rated at 0. Use a dummy resistor as shown to counteract this.Installation Main PCA Pen 2 Main PCA Pen 1 7 TB2 TB1 TB1 7 TB2 24823 TB4 3 2 1 3 2 Relay #2 Load TB3 1 To terminal 1 or 3 OR TB4 3 2 Relay #1 Load TB3 1 3 2 Relay #2 Load 1 To terminal 1 or 3 Relay #1 Load 1 1 2 Load Supply Power Load Supply Power Load Supply Power Load Supply Power Electromechanical Relay Output Wiring Solid State Relay Output Wiring 1 If the load current is less than the minimum rated value of 20 mA.

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Main PCA Pen 2 Main PCA Pen 1 7 TB2 TB1 TB1 7 TB2 24145A 0 to 30 Vac – + TB4 – + TB3 0 to 30 Vac OR – + TB4 – + TB3 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 _ + _ + Customer Supplied Electromechanical Relay Customer Supplied Solid State Relay Figure 2-13 Open Collector Output Wiring 2-28 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 1/99 .

1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .4 Vpeak or 60 Vdc) wiring per Table 2-5.6. Insert the wires under the appropriate screws for the applicable relay output as shown in the figure. Open the recorder door. be sure that you install the power wires into the correct screw terminals as shown in Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8. Insulation of output wires The insulation of wires connected to the relay output terminals shall be rated for the highest voltage involved. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Turn off the power to the recorder. Procedure Refer to Figure 2-14 and follow the procedure in Table 2-13 to wire the current outputs. Tighten the screws to secure the wires. 42. Extra Low Voltage (ELV) wiring (input.2 Current Output Introduction 4 to 20 mA current outputs are optionally available for each pen channel in the recorder models having display and keypad. current output. (See Figure 2-14. Strip 1/4-inch maximum of insulation from the end of each wire and form end to fit under a screw connection. Table 2-13 Current Output Wiring Step Action ATTENTION To avoid damaging the recorder. Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out. and low voltage control/alarm circuits) shall be separated from HAZARDOUS LIVE (>30 Vac. Locate terminal block TB5 on the printed circuit assembly (PCA) for pen 1 or pen 2.Installation 2. Refer to Table 2-11 to see the output function of TB5 with the available output algorithms and options. Refer to Table 2-5 for acceptable wire bundling.) Run the output wires through the appropriate conduit hole (see Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6).Product Manual 2-29 .

Product Manual 1/99 .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Main PCA Pen 2 Main PCA Pen 1 7 TB2 TB1 TB1 7 TB2 24824 Current Output _ or Auxiliary Output TB5 + Load 0-600 Ohms Figure 2-14 Current Output Wiring 2-30 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

6. Tighten the screws to secure the wires. Open the recorder door. Locate the DC OUT terminal block on the Transmitter Power Module. (See Figure 2-15.Product Manual 2-31 . be sure that you install the power wires into the correct screw terminals as shown in Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8.Installation 2. Procedure Refer to Figure 2-15 and follow the procedure in Table 2-14 to wire the transmitter power out. Refer to Table 2-5 for acceptable wire bundling. Insert the wires under the appropriate screws for the transmitter power out as shown in the figure. Strip 1/4-inch maximum of insulation from the end of each wire and form end to fit under a screw connection. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Turn off the power to the recorder.) Run the output wires through the appropriate conduit hole (see Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6). Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out. located above the printed circuit assembly (PCA) for pen 1. Table 2-14 Transmitter Power Out Wiring Step Action ATTENTION To avoid damaging the recorder. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .3 Transmitter Power Out Introduction A recorder model is available that provides +24 Vdc power out to a transmitter.

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Main PCA Pen2 Main PCA Pen1 Transmitter Power Module 24V Output -V +V 50 mA maximum TB2 TB1 TB1 TB2 Pen #1 TB2 24 Vdc* – + – R + Pen #2 TB2 24 Vdc* – XMTR + * See transmitter’s instruction manual for power supply/receiver wiring details.Product Manual 1/99 . For switch settings see Table 3-3 (recorders without display) or Table 4-4 (recorders with display). 2-32 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . + – R Figure 2-15 Transmitter Power Out Wiring NOTE: Ensure switches on SW6 are set to their correct positions prior to applying power to transmitter supply.

and set up is complete. and Operation of Basic Recorder without Display 3. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS PRECAUTION CAN RESULT IN EXPOSURE TO A POTENTIALLY LETHAL SHOCK HAZARD.1 Overview 3. the printed circuit assemblies for the two pens can be set up differently. whether the input is linear or non-linear) and input actuation types. MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT. Each pen channel in the recorder has an associated printed circuit assembly (PCA) shown in Figure 3-1. The PCA for pen 1 (purple) is on the right (when facing the recorder).1 Overview Introduction Set up the functionality of the models that do not have a display and keypad using configuration and input switches. Table 3-1 Topics in Section 3 Topic 3. What’s in this section? Table 3-1 lists the topics covered in this section. This section includes a table that shows the various available combinations of recording selections (such as chart range.Product Manual 3-1 . Startup. Repeat the process for the pen 2 channel. Find your desired configuration for the pen 1 channel on the table. Set up is fast and easy. length of time for single rotation of chart. DO NOT TOUCH POWER CONNECTIONS AT TB1. If your recorder is equipped with two pens.Configuration. Startup. if available on your recorder. the PCA for pen 2 (red) is on the left (if present).3 Startup and Operation See Page 3-1 3-2 3-15 WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD ! SET THE SWITCHES DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION WITH THE UNIT POWER DISCONNECTED. and Operation of Recorder without Display 3. The input switches are the SW6 switchbank. then set the SW1 and SW6 switches as indicated. Configuration. The configuration switches are the SW1 switchbank. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .2 Configuration (Recording Set Up) 3.

! WARNING When the unit is powered a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC line connections at TB1 on each printed circuit assembly. the recorder will use configuration #1. (To set up a model with a display see Section 4 – Configuration. Go to Table 3-3 and find the desired combination of recording selections and input type for the pen 1 channel. whether input is linear or non-linear) and input actuation types. length of time for single rotation of chart. tell the support staff the configuration number(s) of the pen channel(s) in your recorder to speed up the troubleshooting process. the chart plate is swung out. Figure 3-2 shows a sample chart for a 1-pen recorder. Procedure Follow the procedure in Table 3-2 to set up your recorder model without display. Table 3-2 Procedure for Configuring Model without Display Step 1 2 3 4 5 Turn off the power to the recorder. Action ATTENTION If you set the switches in an ON/OFF combination that does not match any of the configurations in Table 3-3. More than one switch may be required to de-energize the recorder. Set the switches in SW1 and SW6 on the pen 1 printed circuit assembly (the PCA on the right when facing recorder) as indicated in Table 3-3.2.Product Manual 1/99 . 3-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . and the power is removed. For each PCA.) Repeat for pen 2 channel (if available).DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 3. If your recorder is equipped with two pens. If you have to call Honeywell Technical Assistance for help. the printed circuit assemblies for the two pens can be set up differently. Table 3-3 shows the various available combinations of recording selections (such as chart range. make a note of the number assigned to the configuration (from first column of Table 3-3). and Operation of Recorder with Display.2 Configuration (Recording Set Up) 3.) The procedure described here assumes that the chart door is opened. Startup. (Pen 1 is purple.1 Setting Configuration and Input Switches Introduction Configuration switches SW1 (see Figure 3-1) and input switches SW6 are provided on each printed circuit assembly associated with a pen channel.

Product Manual 3-3 . and Operation of Recorder without Display Pen #2 Connector Pen #1 Connector Chart Motor P1 P2 P3 J1 SW1 1 23 45 67 8 Battery Connector Communications Board Connector J3 J4 Keyboard/Display Connector ON Configuration Switches S2 = Reset S3 = Lower S4 = Raise SW4 SW2LOWER SW3 RAISE Input Switches N L SETUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 SW5 TB2 AC Power TB1 RUN ON Input Connector Run/Setup Switch SW6 24194 Figure 3-1 Location of Configuration and Input Switches 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Startup.Configuration.

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Configuration and Input switch settings for sample chart Configuration Switch S1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 on off off on on off off off Input Switch S6 1 2 3 4 5 6 off X off off on off X = Don’t care NOON 2PM M 3P 0 TO 150 C J /T/C 140 120 100 80 11A M 10 AM J /T /C 4P M 8AM C /T/ CJ 50 M O1 9A 0 T 5P O1 M 50 C 14 0 12 0 60 0T 10 0 140 80 40 60 120 6PM 40 20 100 20 80 60 40 EW Y E ON L 20 7AM 20 H L 7PM 80 60 40 100 8PM 120 140 M 9P Summary of Input Set Up Switch S6 Functions 1 200 mV 2 Burnout 3 RTD 4 Volts 5 mV 6 mA Figure 3-2 Sample Chart for Single Pen Recorder 3-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 14 0 12 0 M 3A 10 0 80 60 5A M 0T O 2 AM 40 20 6AM 1AM MIDN IGHT 0 TO 150 C J /T/C 140 20 120 40 60 100 11P M 80 10 PM 24082 15 0 C 4A M J/T /C 1/99 .

and Operation of Recorder without Display Table 3-3 Configuration and Input Switch Settings for Models without Display o = off n = on Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = .00385 x in column for SW6 switch 2 = see 3.2.Product Manual 3-5 . Startup.00391 All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = .3 INPUT TYPE CHART TYPE CONFIG # EU NLin CONFIG SWITCHES (SW1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 INPUT SWITCHES (SW6) 2 3 4 5 6 CHART P/N Stored Configuration 0 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o n n n o o n o o x o o n o n o o n o n o o o x o o n o o n n o o o n n n o n o o o n n x x °F x x x x °F x °F °C °F °C x x x B t/c E t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c 0 to 1800 °C 24 Hr 0 to 250 °C 24 Hr 0 to 100 Even 7 Day 0 to 100 Even 24 hr 0 to 1200 °F 24 Hr 0 to 1200 °F 7 Day 0 to 1200 Even 7 Day 0 to 150 °C 24 Hr 0 to 150 °C 7 Day 0 to 1600 °F 24 Hr 0 to 1600 °F 7 Day 0 to 1600 Even 7 Day 0 to 200 °F 24 Hr 0 to 200 Even 24 Hr 0 to 200 Even 24 Hr 0 to 200 Even 7 Day 0 to 200 Even 7 Day 0 to 250 °C 24 Hr 0 to 250 °C 7 Day 0 to 300 °C 24 Hr 78 41 198 197 67 70 178 25 26 72 92 179 35 129 132 135 138 39 40 44 °F °F x x 1660-135 o x o o n o o x o o n o 1661-001 1660-001 1660-004 1661-011 1661-108 1660-070 1661-070 1660-018 1661-018 1661-109 1660-114 1660-010 1660-010 1661-004 1661-004 1660-024 1661-024 1660-062 n n o o o o n o o x o o n o o n n o o o n o o x o o n o o n o o n n o n o x o o n o n o o n n o o o o x o o n o o n o n n o o o o x o o n o o o o n o o n o o x o o n o o o n n n o n o o o o o n n n o o n n o n o x o o n o n n o o o n o o o x o o n o n o o o o o o n o o n o o o o n n n n o o o o n o n o n o o o n o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o n n n o o n o o o x o o n o o o o n o n o o o x o o n o o o n n o n o o o x o o n o 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Configuration.

Product Manual 1/99 .3 INPUT TYPE CHART TYPE CONFIG # EU NLin CONFIG SWITCHES (SW1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 INPUT SWITCHES (SW6) 2 3 4 5 6 CHART P/N J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c J t/c 0 to 300 °F 24 Hr 0 to 300 °F 7 Day 0 to 300 Even 24 Hr 0 to 350 Even 24 Hr 0 to 350 Even 7 Day 0 to 400 °C 24 Hr 0 to 400 °F 24 Hr 0 to 400 Even 24 Hr 0 to 400 Even 24 Hr 0 to 400 Even 7 Day 0 to 400 Even 7 Day 0 to 500 °F 24 Hr 0 to 600 °F 24 Hr 0 to 600 °F 7 Day 0 to 600 Even 24 Hr 0 to 600 Even 24 Hr 0 to 800 °F 24 Hr 0 to 800 °F 7 Day 0 to 800 Even 24 Hr 0 to 800 Even 24 Hr 0 to1000 °F 24 Hr 0 to1000 °F 7 Day 10 to 340 °C 24 Hr 45 90 143 148 149 50 48 152 155 158 161 54 56 57 166 167 59 60 169 170 63 64 46 °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F x x n o n n o n o o o x o o n o o n o n n o n o o x o o n o n n n n o o o n o o n o n o o n n o n o n o o n o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o 1660-002 1661-002 1660-050 1660-037 1661-037 1660-063 1660-012 1660-011 1660-011 1661-005 1661-005 1660-013 1660-003 1661-008 1660-052 1660-052 1660-014 1661-009 1660-137 1660-137 1660-015 1661-010 1660-057 x x o n o o n n o o o x o o n o o o o o n n o o o x o o n o o o o n n o o n n n o n n o o n o n n n n o o n n o o o o n o n o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o x x x o n n o n n o o o x o o n o o o o n n n o o o x o o n o n o o n n n o o o x o o n o o n n o o n o n n n n o o n o n o x o o n o o x o o n o x x n n o n n n o o o x o o n o o o n n n n o o o x o o n o n o o n o n o n o n o n o n o n o x o o n o o x o o n o x x x n n n n n n o o o x o o n o o o o o o o n o o x o o n o o n n n o n o o o x o o n o 3-6 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .00385 x in column for SW6 switch 2 = see 3.00391 All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = .2.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 3-3 Configuration and Input Switch Settings for Models without Display o = off n = on Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = .

2.00391 All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = .Configuration.3 INPUT TYPE CHART TYPE CONFIG # EU NLin CONFIG SWITCHES (SW1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 INPUT SWITCHES (SW6) 2 3 4 5 6 CHART P/N J t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c 10 to 340 °C 7 Day 0 to 1000 °C 24 Hr 0 to 1000 °C 7 Day 0 to 1000 °F 24 Hr 0 to 1000 Even 24 Hr 0 to 1000 Even 24 Hr 0 to 1200 °C 24 Hr 0 to 1200 °F 24 Hr 0 to 1200 °F 7 Day 0 to 1200 Even 24 Hr 0 to 1200 Even 7 Day 0 to 1600 °F 24 Hr 0 to 1600 °F 7 Day 0 to 1600 Even 7 Day 0 to 200 °C 24 Hr 0 to 200 Even 24 Hr 0 to 200 Even 24 Hr 0 to 200 Even 7 Day 0 to 200 Even 7 Day 0 to 2000 °F 24 Hr 0 to 2000 °F 7 Day 0 to 2400 °F 24 Hr 0 to 2400 °F 7 Day 47 65 66 62 174 175 69 68 71 176 177 73 74 180 34 130 133 136 139 79 80 81 82 °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °F °C x x x x n n n n o n o o o x o o n o n o o o o o n o o x o o n o o n o o o o n o o x o o n o o n n n n n o o o x o o n o o n n n o n o n n n n n o n o n o x o o n o o x o o n o 1661-057 1660-049 1661-049 1660-007 1660-173 1660-173 1660-065 1660-006 1661-012 x x x n o n o o o n o o x o o n o o o n o o o n o o x o o n o n n n o o o n o o x o o n o o o o o n n o n n o o o n n o n o x o o n o o x o o n o 1661-108 1660-016 1661-013 1661-109 1660-086 1660-010 1660-010 1661-004 1661-004 1660-005 1661-014 1660-009 1661-015 x x n o o n o o n o o x o o n o o n o n o o n o o x o o n o o o n o n n o n o x o o n o x o n o o o n o o o x o o n o o n o o o o o n n o n o o o o n o o o n o o o n n n o n o o o n o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o x x x x n n n n o o n o o x o o n o o o o o n o n o o x o o n o n o o o n o n o o x o o n o o n o o n o n o o x o o n o 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . and Operation of Recorder without Display Table 3-3 Configuration and Input Switch Settings for Models without Display o = off n = on Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = .Product Manual 3-7 .00385 x in column for SW6 switch 2 = see 3. Startup.

on=85%) RTD RTD 0 to 100 Even 12 Hr 0 to 200 Even 12 Hr °C °C o n n n n n o n n n n n n n o n 1903-002 1903-003 3-8 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 3-3 Configuration and Input Switch Settings for Models without Display o = off n = on Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = .3 INPUT TYPE CHART TYPE CONFIG # EU NLin CONFIG SWITCHES (SW1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 INPUT SWITCHES (SW6) 2 3 4 5 6 CHART P/N K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c K t/c R t/c R t/c R t/c R t/c R t/c R t/c R t/c 0 to 2500 Even 24 Hr 0 to 400 °C 24 Hr 0 to 400 °F 24 Hr 0 to 400 Even 24 Hr 0 to 400 Even 24 Hr 0 to 400 Even 7 Day 0 to 400 Even 7 Day 0 to 500 °F 24 Hr 0 to 600 °C 24 Hr 0 to 600 Even 24 Hr 0 to 800 °C 24 Hr 0 to 800 Even 24 Hr 0 to 1600 °C 24 Hr 0 to 1600 Even 7 Day 0 to 2000 Even 24 Hr 0 to 2500 °F 24 Hr 0 to 2500 °F 7 Day 30 to 2900 °F 24 Hr 30 to 2900 °F 7 Day (off=90%.00385 x in column for SW6 switch 2 = see 3.00391 All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = .2.Product Manual 1/99 . on =95%) 185 51 49 153 156 159 162 55 58 168 61 171 75 181 183 83 84 85 86 253 254 190 191 °F x x °F °C °F °C x x °C x °F x °C °F x x x x n o o n n n o n n n o o n n o o n o o o n n o o n o o n n o o n o o n n n o o n n n n n n o o n o n o o o n o n n n n o n n o o o n o n n n o o o o o n o n o n n o n n n n o o n n o n o n o n n n n o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o 1660-113 1660-064 1660-053 1660-011 1660-011 1661-005 1661-005 1660-059 1660-052 1660-060 1660-137 1660-017 1661-109 1660-202 1660-025 1661-025 1660-032 1661-032 n o n o n n o n n n n o n n o n n n o o n o n o o o n o n o n o n o n o n o n o o n n o n o n o n o n n n n n n o n n n n n n n REMSW1 Digital Pen REMSW2 Digital Pen (off=80%.

00385 x in column for SW6 switch 2 = see 3.3 INPUT TYPE CHART TYPE CONFIG # EU NLin CONFIG SWITCHES (SW1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 INPUT SWITCHES (SW6) 2 3 4 5 6 CHART P/N RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD 0 to 100 Even 24 Hr 0 to 100 Even 24 Hr 0 to 100 Even 7 Day 0 to 100 Even 7 Day 0 to 150 Even 24 Hr 0 to 200 °C 7 Day 0 to 200 Even 24 Hr 0 to 200 Even 7 Day 0 to 200 Even 7 Day 0 to 200 Even 24 Hr 0 to 250 °F 24 Hr 0 to 300 Even 24 Hr 0 to 300 Even 24 Hr 0 to 300 Even 7 Day 0 to 300 Even 7 Day 0 to 400 Even 24 Hr 0 to 400 Even 24 Hr 0 to 400 Even 7 Day 0 to 400 Even 7 Day 0 to 50 Even 24 Hr 0 to 50 Even 7 Day 0 to 70 Even 7 Day 0 to 800 Even 24 Hr 114 115 116 117 118 33 134 137 140 131 36 144 145 146 147 154 157 160 163 110 111 196 172 °C °F °C °F °C x °C °F °C °F x °C °F °C °F °F °C °F °C °C °C °C °F o n o o n n n o n n o o n n n o o o n o n n n o n o n o n n n o o n n o n n n o n o o o o n o o o n n o o o o n n o o n o o o n o o n n o o o n n n o o o o o n o o n o o n o o o o o o n o o n n o o o n o o n o n o o n o o n n n o o n o o n o n o n n o o n n o n n n o o n o o o o o n o n n n o o o n o n o n n n o n n o n n n n o n n o o o n o o o n n o o n n o n o n o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o 1660-001 1660-001 1661-001 1661-001 1660-180 1660-010 1661-004 1661-004 1660-010 1660-050 1660-050 1661-050 1661-050 1660-011 1660-011 1661-005 1661-005 1660-104 1661-051 1661-070 1660-137 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 3-9 .2. and Operation of Recorder without Display Table 3-3 Configuration and Input Switch Settings for Models without Display o = off n = on Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = . Startup.00391 All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = .Configuration.

Product Manual 1/99 .00391 All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = .3 INPUT TYPE CHART TYPE CONFIG # EU NLin CONFIG SWITCHES (SW1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 INPUT SWITCHES (SW6) 2 3 4 5 6 CHART P/N RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD 0 to 800 Even 7 Day -100 to 100 °C 7 Day -100 to 200 °F 24 Hr -100 to 200 °F 7 Day -100 to 200 Even 24 Hr -100 to 200 Even 24 Hr -100 to 200 Even 7 Day -125 to 375 Even 24 Hr -125 to 375 Even 7 Day -130 to 410 Even 24 Hr -130 to 410 Even 7 Day –30 to 70 Even 24 Hr –30 to 70 Even 7 Day –35 to 75 Even 24 Hr –35 to 75 Even 7 Day –35 to 75 Even 24 Hr –35 to 75 Even 7 Day -40 to 200 Even 24 Hr -40 to 200 Even 7 Day -40 to 60 °C 24 Hr -40 to 60 °C 7 Day -5 to 50 Even 24 Hr -5 to 50 Even 7 Day 173 22 29 30 125 127 128 150 151 164 165 186 187 202 203 192 193 122 123 20 91 112 113 °F x x x °C °F °C °F °F °F °F °C °C °F °F °C °C °C °C x x °C °C n o n n o n o n o n n o n o o o n o n n n o o o o n n n n o o o n o n n n n n o n n n n n n n o o o o o o o o n o n n o n o o n n n n o n o o n o o n o o n o n n o n o o n o n o n o n n n o n n n o n n n o n o n o n o o n n n n o n o o n n o o o o o o n n n o o o o o n n o n o n n n n o n n o n n n n o o o n o n o o o n n o n n o n o o o o o n n n o n o o o n n n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o 1660-067 1661-067 1660-022 1661-022 1660-601 1661-601 1660-023 1661-023 1660-023 1661-023 1660-232 1660-232 1661-178 1660-195 (dual range chart) 1661-080 1661-194 (dual range chart) 3-10 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .2.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 3-3 Configuration and Input Switch Settings for Models without Display o = off n = on Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = .00385 x in column for SW6 switch 2 = see 3.

and Operation of Recorder without Display Table 3-3 Configuration and Input Switch Settings for Models without Display o = off n = on Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = .Product Manual 3-11 .2.00391 All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = .3 INPUT TYPE CHART TYPE CONFIG # EU NLin CONFIG SWITCHES (SW1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 INPUT SWITCHES (SW6) 2 3 4 5 6 CHART P/N RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD –50 to 250 Even 24 Hr –50 to 250 Even 7 Day -50 to 50 °C 24 Hr -80 to 20 Even 7 Day 730 to 780 Even 24 Hr (test) (factory configuration) 80 to 180 °F 12 Hr -85 to 190 Even 24 Hr -90 to 190 Even 24 Hr -90 to 190 Even 7 Day -90 to 210 Even 24 Hr -90 to 210 Even 7 Day 0 to 150 °C 24 Hr -125 to 375 °F 24 Hr -125 to 375 °F 7 Day 50 to 150 °C 24 Hr 0 to 1600 °C 7 Day 0 to 1600 Even 7 Day 0 to 2000 Even 24 Hr 0 to 3000 °F 24 Hr 0 to 3000 °F 7 Day 0 to 150 °C 24 Hr 0 to 150 °C 7 Day 194 195 19 199 252 °C °C x °C °F o n o o o o n n n n o o o o n n n n o o n o o o n n n o o o n n o o n n n n n n x o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o 1661-109 1660-202 1660-147 1661-147 1660-103 1660-090 1660-020 1661-020 1903-001 1660-179 1660-197 (dual range chart) 1661-642 (dual range chart) 1660-092 1661-653 (dual range chart) RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD RTD* RTD* RTD* RTD* S t/c S t/c S t/c S t/c S t/c T t/c T t/c 89 119 120 121 141 142 27 42 43 28 76 182 184 87 88 °C °F °C °C °F °C °F n o o n n o n o n n n o n n n o o o o n n n n o n o o n n n n o n o n n o o o n o n n n o o o n x x x x x n n o n n o o o o n o n o n o o n n o n o n o o o o n n n o o o o o n n o o n o o n n o n n o n o o o n n n o n x x x n n n o n o n o o o o n n o n o n n n o n o o o o o o n n o o o 23 24 x 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Startup.00385 x in column for SW6 switch 2 = see 3.Configuration.

00385 x in column for SW6 switch 2 = see 3.Product Manual 1/99 .3 INPUT TYPE CHART TYPE CONFIG # EU NLin CONFIG SWITCHES (SW1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 INPUT SWITCHES (SW6) 2 3 4 5 6 CHART P/N T t/c T t/c T t/c T t/c T t/c T t/c T t/c T t/c T t/c T t/c T t/c T t/c T t/c T t/c T t/c T t/c T t/c W t/c 0-200 mV -100 to 100 °C 7 Day -100 to 200 °C 24 Hr -100 to 200 °C 7 Day -100 to 200 Even 24 Hr -100 to 200 Even 24 Hr -130 to 410 °F 24 Hr -130 to 410 °F 7 Day -250 to 150 °F 24 Hr -250 to 150 °F 7 Day –30 to 70 Even 24 Hr –30 to 70 Even 7 Day –35 to 75 Even 24 Hr –35 to 75 Even 7 Day –35 to 75 Even 24 Hr –35 to 75 Even 7 Day -90 to 210 °C 24 Hr -90 to 210 °C 7 Day 0 to 1800 °C 24 Hr Any linear chart 24 Hr 21 x x x n o n o n o o o n n n n n o o o o o o o o n o o o o n n n n n o o n n n n n n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o o o o n o o o o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o o n o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o o n o n x o o o o n x o o o o o x o o n o o x o o n o 1661-069 124 126 52 53 94 93 188 189 206 207 204 205 37 38 77 8 17 7 °F °C x x x x °C °C °F °F °C °C x x x 1660-232 1660-232 1660-033 1661-033 1660-042 1661-042 1660-601 (dual range chart) o o n o n n o o n o n o n n o o o n n n n o n o n o n n n o n o o o n n n n o n n o n n n n o n o n n n o o n n n n n n o o n n o o n n o o n n n o n n o o n n n o n o o n o o o n n o o n o o n o n n o o n o o o o n o o o o n o o o n o o o n n n o o o o o o o o o n o o o 1660-601 (dual range chart) 1660-023 1661-023 1660-023 1661-023 1660-034 1661-034 1660-157 24001660-tab 24001661-tab 24001660-tab 0-200mV Any linear chart 7 Day 0-100 mV Any linear chart 24 Hr 0-100mV Any linear chart 7 Day 16 24001661-tab 3-12 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .00391 All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 3-3 Configuration and Input Switch Settings for Models without Display o = off n = on Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = .2.

00385 x in column for SW6 switch 2 = see 3.Product Manual 3-13 .Configuration. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .2.00391 All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = .3 INPUT TYPE CHART TYPE CONFIG # EU NLin CONFIG SWITCHES (SW1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 INPUT SWITCHES (SW6) 2 3 4 5 6 CHART P/N 0-20 mA Any linear chart 24 Hr 0-20 mA Any linear chart 7 Day 4-20 mA Any linear chart 24 Hr 4-20 mA Any linear chart 7 Day 0-10 mV Any linear chart 24 Hr 0-10 mV Any linear chart 7 Day 0-10 V Any linear chart 24 Hr 0-10 V Any linear chart 7 Day 0-5 V Any linear chart 24 Hr (default setting) Any linear chart 7 Day Any linear chart 24 Hr Any linear chart 7 Day Any linear chart 24 Hr Any linear chart 7 Day Any linear chart 24 Hr Any linear chart 7 Day 9 18 3 12 6 15 5 14 1* n o o n o o o o o n o o n o o o n n o o o o o o o o n n o o o o o n n o o o o o n n n n o o o o n o n o o o o o o n n n o o o o n o o o o o o o o n o n o o o o o n o o o o o o n n o n o o o o o o n o o o o o n o n n o o o o o o o n o o n n n o o n o o n n o x o n o n o x o n o n o x o n o n o x o n o n o x o o n o o x o o n o o x o n o o o x o n o o o x o n o o o x o n o o o x o n o o o x o n o o o x o n o o o x o n o o o x o n o o o x o n o o 24001660-tab 24001661-tab 24001660-tab 24001661-tab 24001660-tab 24001661-tab 24001660-tab 24001661-tab 24001660-tab 0-5 V 1-5 V 1-5 V 0-1 V 0-1v 2-10 Volt 2-10 Volt 10 2 11 4 13 200 24001661-tab 24001660-tab 24001661-tab 24001660-tab 24001661-tab 201 * See Table 3-2 Attention note. and Operation of Recorder without Display Table 3-3 Configuration and Input Switch Settings for Models without Display o = off n = on Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = . Startup.

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 3. 3-14 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . It is important. • If SW6 switch 2 is OFF. the pen will be driven upscale if the input fails. the recorder will not be able to process the input accurately. however. even when the input sensor is providing a valid signal.2. to set the switch to OFF in the case of RTD actuation. the setting of SW6 switch 2 affects the displayed input in case of burnout or other input failure.3 Setting SW6 Switch 2 Off for RTD actuation For thermocouple and mV inputs. ATTENTION If SW6 switch 2 is ON for an RTD input. • If SW6 switch 2 is ON. the pen will be driven downscale if the input fails.Product Manual 1/99 .

WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD ! SET THE SWITCHES DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION WITH THE UNIT POWER DISCONNECTED. Startup. MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT.3. and prepared as described earlier in this section. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS PRECAUTION CAN RESULT IN EXPOSURE TO A POTENTIALLY LETHAL SHOCK HAZARD. and Operation of Recorder without Display 3.3 Startup and Operation of Recorder without Display 3.Product Manual 3-15 .Configuration.1 Overview Introduction This subsection provides procedures and reference information for operating the recorder models that do not have a display. It assumes that the recorder has been properly mounted and wired in accordance with the instructions in Section 2. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . DO NOT TOUCH POWER CONNECTIONS AT TB1.

Pull up on the pen lifter to raise the pen(s) from the chart plate and remove the protective cap from each pen tip. Turn the chart until the desired time line on the chart is aligned with the time index on the chart plate and pen 1 before closing the locking clip on the hub. ATTENTION Never move the pen arms when the unit is operating unless adjusting the pen alignment as described in Section 7. and press it into place over the chart hub. Procedure Refer to Figure 3-3 to identify the basic chart plate components and follow the procedure in Table 3-4 to prepare the recorder for operation. ! WARNING When the unit is powered.Product Manual 1/99 . CAUTION: Do not try to rotate the hub Action Time index Pen lifter Large chart hub 24213 Figure 3-3 Basic Chart Plate Components 3-16 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Table 3-4 Preparing the Recorder for Operation Step 1 2 3 4 Open the door. pen and time index. a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC power connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assemblies for the pens (behind the chart plate).DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 3. Push down on the lifter to return the pen(s) to the chart. Slip the new chart under the pen lifter. complete these preparation tasks.3.2 Preparing the Recorder for Operation Introduction Before applying power to the recorder.

Configuration. Table 3-5 continued on next page. Table 3-5 Procedure for Running the Step Test Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action/Result Turn off the power to the recorder. Graphic See Figure 3-1. 6 7 8 Apply power to the recorder. 9 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . All other SW1 switches should be ON (toward the edge of the board). Note the position of all eight switches on SW1 on the printed circuit assembly (PCA) for each pen. This is configuration #252 in Table 3-3.Product Manual 3-17 . and Operation of Recorder without Display 3. regardless of configured chart speed. This test is initiated by setting switches as described in Table 3-5. Set switches 1 and 2 in SW1 in the OFF position on each pen’s PCA. The test will run for one complete revolution of the chart before it returns to normal operation.3 Running the Optional Step Test Introduction You can test the recorder’s mechanical operation by running a “step test”. Loosen captive screw and swing out the chart plate. (When the test has been completed the pens will move away from the test position. Place run switch SW5 to the setup position (toward the top of the board) on each pen’s PCA. Make sure the cap is removed from the tip of each pen and the chart is installed. This test prints a step pattern. The recorder will begin the test. The chart revolution for the test takes approximately three minutes.3. WARNING When the unit is powered. which is independent of any chart settings. with horizontal lines drawn by both pens at each 10% increment on the chart (see Figure 3-4). a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC power connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assemblies for the pens (behind the chart plate).) At the conclusion of the test turn off the power to the recorder. ! Procedure Use the procedure in Table 3-5 to run the step test. but the recorder cannot return to normal operation until the switches are returned to their correct non-test settings. The duration of the test is approximately 3 minutes. Startup.

Product Manual 1/99 . Secure the chart plate in the operational position. Graphic 11 12 13 Set configuration switches on the PCA for each pen back to the settings noted in Step 4.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 3-5 Procedure for Running the Step Test. To resume normal operation leave SW5 in the run position and power up the recorder. 24141 Figure 3-4 Typical Step Test Chart Patterns 3-18 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Chart step pattern Figure 3-4 is a typical chart step pattern generated by the recorder in the step test. Continued Step 10 Action/Result Place run switch SW5 to the run position (toward the bottom of the board) on each PCA.

Configuration. Push down on the lifter to return the pen(s) to the chart. Pull up the pen lifter to raise the pen(s) from the chart plate.2 • prepared the recorder as described in subsection 3. Procedure To set the chart time and apply power.3.Product Manual 3-19 . follow the procedure in Table 3-6. The pen(s) will move into position and the recorder will start to track the input value.4 Startup Introduction The recorder is almost ready for operation when you have: • mounted and wired the recorder as described in Section 2 • set up the recorder as described in subsection 3.2 The only remaining tasks are aligning the chart time and applying power. and Operation of Recorder without Display 3. Startup.3. CAUTION: Do not try to rotate the hub 4 5 Close the door and apply power.) Table 3-6 Startup Procedure Step 1 2 3 Open the door. (See also Figure 3-5. Turn the chart until the desired time line on the chart is aligned with the time index on the chart plate and pen 1 before closing the locking clip on the hub. Action Time index Pen lifter Large chart hub 24212 Figure 3-5 Setting Chart Time to Time Index 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

Product Manual 1/99 .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 3-20 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

and Operation of Recorder with Display 4.2 Operator Interface of Recorder with Display and Keypad 4.3 Configuration (Recording and Output Set Up) 4.4 Startup of Recorder with Display and Keypad 4. Table 4-1 Topics in Section 4 Topic 4. What’s in this section? Table 4-1 lists the topics covered in this section.1 Overview Introduction This section provides instructions for configuring. starting. and operating DR4300 recorder models having a display and keypad.1 Overview 4.Configuration.Product Manual 4-1 . Configuration. Startup and Operation of Recorder with Display 4.5 Operation of Recorder with Display and Keypad See Page 4-1 4-2 4-4 4-50 4-59 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Startup.

change setpoints (if the recorder hardware supports outputs). Configuration mode .Displays Set Up group and function parameters.Displays selection or parameter value.four characters Normal operation . Displays and indicators The indicators and text displayed let you see what is happening to your process and how the recorder is responding. or when NumSPs = TWO L = Setpoint 1 (SP) active R = Setpoint 2 (S2) active 24278 Otherwise.Displays process variable (PV) for the selected input channel. when lit. Upper Display .Product Manual 1/99 . Figure 4-1 is a view of the operator interface.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4. With totalization. shows totalizer value. DR4312. neither indicator is used. Configuration mode .Displays selected operating parameter label and value. OUT 1 2 Lower Display . Indicates controller mode: M = Manual A = Automatic When either of the remote switches is set for SP2. and assign application-specific values to configuration parameters. Figure 4-1 Operator Interface 4-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . and procedures for starting up and operating the recorder. using the display and keypad to configure the recorder. A description of the displays and indicators is included. This subsection describes the operator interface.six characters Normal operation . INP 12 FC MA RL SET UP DISP FUNC MAN AUTO Output relay 1 or 2 is ON. DR4331 and DR4332 models include a display and keypad used to view real time values. Data displayed is for input Channel 1 or 2 Indicates temperature units of PV on display.2 Operator Interface on Recorder with Display and Keypad Introduction The DR4311.

1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . and if the program is not executing the last of multiple cycles. See Appendix F for detailed instructions for using Accutune II.nn)** REC nn = Setpoint Program Cycles Remaining** TuneON or TuneOF = Status of Accutune II (Displayed only when Tuning group TUNE = ENAB. its value to the right.Product Manual 4-3 . OT = Output SP = Setpoint 1 S2 = Setpoint 2* UseSPn = Setpoint Select (Only appears if Control group NumSPs = TWO) DE = PV Deviation from Setpoint XXXXXX = Totalizer Value = Time Remaining on Optional Timer (Hrs:Min) or = Elapsed Time on Optional Timer (Hrs:Min) (Displayed only if TIMER = ENAB.) The input PV for the currently displayed channel is always on the upper display during normal operation. Table 4-2 Key Functions Key SET UP Function • Places the recorder in the configuration set up group select mode. See Appendix E for detailed instructions for executing a setpoint program. the timer is not running. the label shown below will be displayed at the left of the lower display. INP = Input. • Used in conjunction with the SET UP key to select the individual functions of a selected configuration set up group. With the exception of “INP”. (Only those parameters required by the supported features will be included in the display cycle. the other parameters listed below are not applicable. • Pressing this key repeatedly cycles through the operating parameters displayed on the lower display. Startup.) FUNC DISP *The second setpoint is available if one of the digital inputs is configured to use this alternate setpoint in case an external event triggers the “remote switch”. or if Control group parameter NUMSPs = TWO. In this case. REC cycles remaining will be displayed only if the program was set to run more than 1 cycle.) SPRG n = Setpoint Program Select (Displayed only if SPRAMP group SPPROG = ENAB) RUN or HOLD = Status of currently executing setpoint program** N nn. • Used during field calibration procedure. Sequentially displays set up groups and allows the FUNC key to display function parameters within set up group.nn = Current Setpoint Program Segment (N) and Time Remaining (nn.Configuration. If “clock hand” is not moving. • Used to toggle between input channel selection for display (2-pen recorder models only). if the recorder does not support any optional features. **Displayed only when a setpoint program is being executed. and Operation of Recorder with Display Key functions Table 4-2 shows each key on the operator interface and defines its function. then this label is always displayed on the lower display.

If the hardware supports optional relay outputs for each pen. or entering them as numeric values. the PCA on the left is for pen 2 (red). then this key can be used to start the timer. The PCA on the right (when facing recorder) is for pen 1 (purple). Relay 2. To stop the timer before its timeout period has expired. setup parameters are displayed. or configuration values displayed. parameters are available for configuring control and/or alarms using these outputs. and to specify input state in case of input failure. which was energized when the timer expired. use the Increment or Decrement key to reset the timer. set TIMER = DIS. monitoring the value of the input and comparing it to the configured limit value. then it can be wired for Normally Open and Normally Closed action. and DR4332 models are used for setting up recording and output options in Set Up (configuration) mode. If an optional relay is used. and stored on the printed circuit assembly (PCA) associated with that pen. function parameters are configured separately for each pen. DR431.3 Configuration (Recording and Output Set Up) 4. RESET does not apply. MAN Controller is in Manual mode. RESET: • On Limit Controllers this key functions as RESET.2. Once the timer has expired.3. *** • Decreases the setpoint. Designate site-specific values by selecting them from a list of choices. If your recorder is equipped with two pens.) When the recorder is in configuration mode. used to take the recorder out of the limit state (once the cause of the limit state has been corrected) and to cause it to resume normal operation. output. 4-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . (Instructions for using the user interface are in 4. DR4331.1 Overview Introduction The display and keypad on the DR4311. or configuration values displayed. will be de-energized when the timer is reset. Hardware switches must be set to match the input type.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 4-2 Key Functions (continued) Key MAN AUTO RESET Function For recorder model with control: MAN/AUTO: • Alternately selects: AUTO Controller is in Automatic mode. grouped by function. *** ***If the timer is enabled (TIMER = ENAB) and Timer group parameter START = KEY. 4. • Increases the setpoint. output.Product Manual 1/99 . as well as for displaying real-time values during normal operation.

(Some prompts may not be displayed.see Section 8 of manual 24195a * For Limit Control Prompts. Read the diagram from left to right. depending on the configuration and lock status of the recorder. INPUT DECMAL Continued from previous line UNITS FILTER CHT HI HR/REV RESET NUMSPs SP LO FS MODE TUNE RATE2 T TI MIN PERIOD A1S2 TY A2S1VA 4 mA VA ADDRES REMSW 2 IN TYP XMITTR LD CAL INP HI INP LO BIAS Continued next line BRNOUT CHT LO CHT TYP TOTAL OUT ALG ACTION PBorGN AT ERR I2 MIN or I2 RPM FINLSP START A1S1 VA A2S2VA 20mA V BAUD XMTDLY RATE CURRNG OUT HI MINRPM PBorGAIN CYCT1 SP PROG L DISP A1S2 VA A2S1HL A1S1 HL A2S2HL A1S2 HL ALHYS A2S1TY A2S2TY Continued next line PEN CHART TOTAL CONTRL* PEN IN CHT SPD Σ (value) SCALER CTRALG OUT LO RSTABL PWRUP DBAND DEFDSP HYST SP HI FAILSF Continued next line Continued next line CONTRL Continued from previous line Continued from previous line TUNING FUZZY Continued from previous line RATE T CYCT2 I MIN orI RPM MANRST PB2orGAIN2 Continued next line SP RAMP TIMER ALARMS SP RAMP TIMER A1S1 TY Continued from previous line AUX OUT COMM REM SW ALIN CAL LOCK STATUS AUX OUT COMM REMSW 1 For pen alignment . See Table 4-19. Keys let you make a selection or change the value.see Section 5 of manual LOCK For status displays . and Operation of Recorder with Display 4. Startup. Func Key lets you call up the specific function prompts within each group.3.Product Manual 4-5 .see Section 8 of manual For field calibration .2 Configuration Prompts Diagram: prompt hierarchy Figure 4-2 is an overview of the hierarchy of set up groups and their associated function prompts.Configuration. Figure 4-2 Prompt Hierarchy 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .) Set Up Key lets you move from one set up group to another.

5 “Switch Settings” for required hardware switch settings on the printed circuit assembly associated with each pen. 4-6 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .3. and the factory setting. The hardware switches should be set before specifying values for function parameters. It allows you to quickly find a parameter and determine the appropriate value or selection for your application. and the function parameters within each of these groups (shown in the prompt hierarchy in Figure 4-2). the range of setting or selections available.4 “Configuration Tips”. Set the hardware switches Refer to subsection 4. The list includes the name of the prompt. Install recorder Connect the recorder to AC power as described in Section 2 so that you will be able to configure the unit using the display. the definition of each parameter.3. These tips will help you configure your recorder quickly and easily.3. Complete configuration record sheet Subsection 4.3.3.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4.Product Manual 1/99 .3 How to Get Started Read the configuration tips Read subsection 4. It is good practice to record your instrument’s configuration for future reference.20 contains a “Configuration Record Sheet”. Assign application-specific values to the set up parameters The set up groups and function parameters are listed in this section in the order of their appearance on the display.6 “Configuration Procedure” to learn how to access the set up groups. Become familiar with the configuration procedure Read subsection 4.

19).Product Manual 4-7 . Scrolling Holding the SET UP key in will scroll through the set up groups. Timing out from Set Up mode If you are in Set Up (configuration) mode and do not press any keys for one minute. • Press the key again and you will move one more digit to the left. If you can not change configuration parameters. ]. The group titles are listed in this section in the order that they appear in the recorder.3. you can adjust a more significant digit in the upper display by holding in one key [ ] or [ and pressing the other [ ] or [ ] at the same time. the recorder will time out and revert to the mode and display that was being used prior to entry into Set Up mode. and Operation of Recorder with Display 4. • The adjustment will move one digit to the left.4 Configuration Tips Introduction Table 4-3 contains tips that will help you enter the configuration data more quickly. you can scroll through or key. This returns the display to the same state it was in immediately preceding entry into the Set Up mode.3. when any set up group is displayed. Displaying Functions Use the FUNC key to display the individual function parameters under each group. The prompts are listed in the order of their appearance in each group. Changing values quickly When changing the value of a parameter. hold the FUNC key in to scroll through the prompts within that group.Configuration. When in any the set up groups twice as fast using the set up group. Startup. However. Exiting Set Up mode To exit Set Up mode. check the status of the “LOCK” parameter (see 4. Table 4-3 Configuration Tips Function Displaying Groups Tip Use the SET UP key to display the set up groups. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . press the DISP key.

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4.5. 4. the input hardware switches 1.1 Introduction Significance of hardware switches in models with display SW6 input switches: The display and keypad are used to configure the software on each pen channel’s printed circuit assembly (PCA). Details are provided in subsection 4.3. the recorder’s behavior will depend on the settings of the SW1 switches. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS PRECAUTION CAN RESULT IN EXPOSURE TO A POTENTIALLY LETHAL SHOCK HAZARD.3. the recorder will use the configuration in Table 3-3 that matches the SW1 switch settings.3. Alternatively.5 Switch Settings 4. if the “BRNOUT” parameter has a value of “UP” or “DOWN” switch 2 should be set to match.3. (If the switch setting combination does not match any configuration in Table 3-3. WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD ! SET THE SWITCHES DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION WITH THE UNIT POWER DISCONNECTED. if all SW1 switches are not OFF when the cable is disconnected. This is required so that the recorder hardware will provide an appropriate value to the recorder software. the recorder will use configuration #1. However. In addition. 3. SW1 configuration switches: In a recorder model having a display and keypad all switches in SW1 will be ignored if the cable from the display and keypad assembly is plugged into J4 on the PCA associated with the pen channel.5.5. SW6 burnout switch 2: This burnout switch should be set to specify whether the input used by the recorder for the channel should be sent over range or under range if the input to the recorder fails while the “BRNOUT” parameter value is “NONE”.) Safety precautions Exercise appropriate safety precautions when setting switches. DO NOT TOUCH POWER CONNECTIONS AT TB1. 4-8 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .2. (SW1 switches are used to configure recorder models that do not have a display and keypad as described in Section 3. 5 and 6 in SW6 must be set to match the input type as described in subsection 4. MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT. the recorder will continue to use the software configuration entered with the display and keypad.3.) ATTENTION If the display cable is disconnected after the software has been configured using the display and keypad. If all SW1 switches are in the OFF position when the cable is disconnected.Product Manual 1/99 .

along with the “BRNOUT” parameter in the input group.Configuration.3.5. The appropriate switch settings for the various input types are shown in Table 4-4.3.) Table 4-4 SW6 Input Switch Settings for Models Having Display and Keypad Input Type 1 0 to 1 V 0 to 2 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 2 to 10 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 mV 0 to 100 mV 0 to 200 mV 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA all thermocouples all RTDs off off off off off off off off ON off off off off SW6 Input Switch Settings 2 “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ off 3 off off off off off off off off off off off off ON 4 ON ON ON ON ON ON off off off ON ON off off 5 off off off off off off ON ON off off off ON ON 6 off off off off off off off off off ON ON off off “ This switch is used to select whether the input value used by the recorder should be driven over range or under range in case of input failure. The location of SW6 is shown in Figure 4-3.2 Setting SW6 Input Switches SW6 switches 1. 5.3.3.3. and Operation of Recorder with Display 4.5. Note that the setting of switch 2 in SW6 is not related to input type. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . See subsection 4. Startup. 3.Product Manual 4-9 .5. 4. 6 define input type In a recorder model having a display and keypad the input switches at SW6 must be set to match the type of input to be used. ATTENTION The ON position for SW6 switches is toward the left side of the printed circuit assembly (when facing recorder. to specify the effects of an input failure as described in subsection 4. It is used.

If the pen is configured to trace the input value (“PENIN” pen set up parameter value is “INP”). However.3. even when the input sensor is providing a valid input signal. mV. When the input failure first occurs. See subsection 4. the recorder uses the configured failsafe value as the output in case of input failure. the displayed input for a thermocouple input will briefly be driven according to the hardware switch setting. “UP” or “DOWN”. in the case of thermocouple inputs. In case of input failure.) SW6 switch 2 setting determines displayed thermocouple input if BRNOUT = NONE If the value of “BRNOUT” is “NONE” when a thermocouple input fails. the displayed input value will show little change. The displayed value (over range or under range) as configured in “BRNOUT”. SW6 switch 2 must always be set to OFF. SW6 switch 2 setting for thermocouple inputs should match BRNOUT if BRNOUT = UP OR DOWN We recommend that. CAUTION If SW6 switch 2 is ON for an RTD input. the displayed value will be under range. regardless of the setting of SW6 switch 2 or the value assigned to the “BRNOUT” parameter.3 Setting SW6 Burnout Switch Overview What happens to the displayed input value when the input signal to the recorder fails depends on several factors: the input type. and the value of the “BRNOUT” parameter in the input set up group. and mA inputs It does not matter whether SW6 switch 2 is ON or OFF if the pen channel uses a Volt. SW6 switch 2 setting unimportant for Volt. the recorder will not be able to process the input correctly. The recorder can display 1% over or under range for thermocouples. the setting of SW6 switch 2. will remain on the display until a valid input is restored. (However. SW6 switch 2 OFF for RTD If the input to the pen channel is from an RTD.Product Manual 1/99 . 4-10 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .11 for details. • If SW6 switch 2 is OFF.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4. as soon as the software recognizes that it has received an out-of-range input signal. mV. configured for “BRNOUT”. Note that the over range or under range input will have no effect on output. then the setting of SW6 switch 2 determines whether the displayed input value will be under range or over range. then the pen will also be driven over or under range. the displayed value will be over range.5. When “BRNOUT” = “NONE”. rather than a calculated value based on input. • If SW6 switch 2 is ON. or mA input signal. the displayed input will be driven according to the value. SW6 switch 2 be set to OFF if “BRNOUT” = “UP” and ON if “BRNOUT” = “DOWN”.3. the value of “BRNOUT” is still important to implementing your control strategy because the value of “BRNOUT” affects the output used in case of input failure.

Output Relay Output Figure 4-3 Location of Switches and Relays 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . For example. operator confusion may result.Configuration. and Operation of Recorder with Display If the switch and the set up parameter do not match.Product Manual 4-11 . the effect of the mismatch is insignificant. then quickly go over range. except for the brief period before the software reacts to the out-of-range value. However. in case of mismatch the displayed value could first go under range. Startup. Pen #2 Connector Pen #1 Connector Chart Motor P1 P2 P3 J1 SW1 12 34 56 78 Battery Connector Communications Board Connector J3 J4 Keyboard/Display Connector ON Configuration Switches S2 = Reset S3 = Lower S4 = Raise SW4 SW2LOWER SW3 RAISE Input Switches N L SETUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 SW5 RUN ON TB2 Input Connector AC Power TB1 Run/Setup Switch SW6 TB4 3 2 1 TB3 3 2 1 TB5 1 24084 Current Output/Aux.

Then proceed to the next step.5. This procedure tells you the keys to press to get to any set up group (and any associated function parameters prompt).Product Manual 1/99 . if you set the control group function “CONTRL” to “DIS”. Lower Display INPUT 2 Select any set up group SET UP • Successive presses of the SET UP key will display the other set up group titles shown in the prompt hierarchy in Figure 4-2. Procedure Follow the procedure listed in Table 4-5 to access the set up groups and function prompts. • You can also use the [ ] [ ] keys to scan the set up groups in both directions. For example.3. • Stop at the set up group title which describes the group of parameters you want to configure.19. During configuration some function parameters will not be displayed if they do not apply to your application. then no other control group prompts will be displayed.3.3.6 Configuration Procedure Introduction The configuration prompts are sequenced in a group/function hierarchy as shown in Figure 4-2. configure all the function parameters that are applicable for your recorder model and application. Table 4-5 is continued on next page 4-12 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . This is the first set up group title. Keep this worksheet as a record of how your recorder was configured.20.3.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4. be sure to identify individual parameters for each pen and control loop as applicable. Once you have set the input switches in SW6 as described in 4. disabling control. Table 4-5 Configuration Procedure Step 1 Operation Select Set Up mode Press SET UP Upper Display SET Result Lets you know you are in the configuration mode and a set up group title is being displayed in the lower display. If you have a 2-pen recorder. To enter your selections or values.” See subsection 4. follow the procedure in Table 4-5 and fill in the values or selections on the worksheet in subsection 4. Make sure lock set up group “LOCK” function is set to “NONE” or “CAL.

and Operation of Recorder with Display Table 4-5 Configuration Procedure. • If the display flashes. 6 Enter the value or selection • This key selects another function prompt. FUNC or SET UP • This key selects another set up group. For 2-pen recorders. Shows the first function prompt within the selected set up group. • See subsection 4. Any changes made during the configuration session are stored when configuration mode is exited. 7 Exit Configuration DISP 8 2-Pen Recorders FUNC 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .4 “Configuration Tips” for instructions to increase or decrease value quickly. Lower Display DECMAL Example displays show Input group function prompt “DECMAL” and the value selected. you are trying to make an unacceptable entry.Configuration. then proceed to the next step. 4 Select other function parameters FUNC • Successive presses of the FUNC key will sequentially display the other function prompts of the set up group you have selected.3. 5 Change the value or selection or • These keys increment or decrement the value or selection that appears for the function prompt you have selected. Continued Step 3 Operation Select a function parameter Press Upper Display Result FUNC xxxx Shows the current value or selection for the first function prompt of the set up group that you have selected. • Stop at the function prompt that you want to change. • Change the value or selection to meet your needs. The value or selection you have made will be entered into memory after another key is pressed.Product Manual 4-13 . Startup. press FUNC key to select INP 2 for display and return to step 1 to configure the parameters for pen 2. This exits configuration mode and returns the recorder to the same state it was in immediately before you entered configuration mode.

UNITS NONE F C TEMPERATURE UNITS—This selection will be indicated on the PV display. Press FUNC key to select channel. Press FUNC key to display the parameters.Product Manual 1/99 . the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface. Value of “IN TYP” parameter must be for a linear input type for two decimal places to be displayed. actuation.X XX.7 Input Parameters Set Up Group Introduction These are the parameters required to configure the temperature units. high and low range values in engineering units. decimal location. Input group prompts Table 4-6 lists all the function prompts in the input set up group.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4. bias. filter.3. Table 4-6 Input Parameter Definitions Lower Display Prompt DECMAL Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition DECIMAL POINT LOCATION—This selection determines where the decimal point appears in the display. and burnout. If PV requires 4 whole digits.XX [factory setting] None One Place Two Places NOTE: Be sure the selection agrees with the value to be displayed. For a 2-pen recorder. the decimal will not show. [factory setting] No units Degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Celsius Table 4-6 is continued on next page 4-14 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . XXXX XXX. Press SETUP key until “INPUT” appears in the lower display.

alarm setpoint. Be sure that the values configured for the high and low chart range. Lin [factory setting] Srt Linear—No characterization applied to input. and Operation of Recorder with Display Table 4-6 Input Parameter Definitions.00385 **IEC Alpha = 0. Continued Lower Display Prompt IN TYP Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition INPUT ACTUATION TYPE—This selection specifies what actuation you are going to use for the input.00391 XMITTR Transmitter Input Type—Use this parameter to specify whether the input should be used as the PV without characterization (linear) or the square root of the input should be used as the PV. Startup. are within the measuring range for the selected actuation type. . For example: suppose the linear input range is 0 to 5000 and the input type is 0 to 5 volts.50 = . Then if input = 2. etc.Product Manual 4-15 .71% .Configuration.7071 = 70.5 V = 50%. B EH EL JH JL KH KL NNM NIC R S TH TL W 100 H*[factory setting] 100 L* 100 T** 4-20 0-20 10m 100m 200m 0-1 0-2 1-5 0-5 0-10 2-10 B thermocouple 105 E thermocouple high –454 E thermocouple low –200 J thermocouple high 0 J thermocouple low 20 K thermocouple high -320 K thermocouple low –20 NiNiMo thermocouple 32 Nicrosil-Nisil thermocouple 0 R thermocouple 0 S thermocouple 0 T thermocouple high –300 T thermocouple low –200 W thermocouple 0 100 Ohm–RTD (high) –300 100 Ohm-RTD (low) –130 100 Ohm-RTD (special) –238 4 to 20 Milliamps 0 to 20 Milliamps 0 to 10 Millivolts 0 to 100 Millivolts 0 to 200 Millivolts 0 to 1 Volt 0 to 2 Volts 1 to 5 Volts 0 to 5 Volts 0 to 10 Volts 2 to 10 Volts to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to 3300°F 1832°F 1100°F 1600°F 770°F 2500°F 1000°F 2500°F 2372°F 3100°F 3100°F 700°F 600°F 4200°F 900°F 392°F 482°F 41 –270 –129 –18 –7 -196 –29 0 –18. Square Root—PV is the square root of input.7071 x 5000 = 3535 = PV Table 4-6 is continued on next page 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .8 –18 –18 –184 –129 –18 –184 –90 –150 to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to 1815°C 1000°C 593°C 871°C 410°C 1371°C 538°C 1371°C 1300°C 1704°C 1704°C 371°C 316°C 2316°C 482°C 200°C 250°C * IEC Alpha = 0.

Product Manual 1/99 . If you do not want filtering. enter 0. INP HI –999 to 9999 INPUT HIGH RANGE VALUE in engineering units is displayed but can only be configured for linear input type. Otherwise. the value of LD CAL is automatically set to FLD at the completion of the field calibration operation. • Otherwise. • Scale the input signal to the display value you want for 100%. FILTER FOR INPUT—A software digital filter is provided for the input to smooth the input signal. You can configure the first order lag time constant from 1 to 120 seconds. this is a read-only display of the low range value for the selected T/C or RTD input type. this is a read-only display of the higher range value for the selected T/C or RTD input type. or some other cause. See example in “INPHI”. • EXAMPLE: Actuation (Input) = 4 to 20 mA Process Variable = Flow Range of Flow = 0 to 250 Gal/Min High Range display value = 250 Then 20 mA = 250 Gal/Min INP LO –999 to 9999 in Engineering Units INPUT LOW RANGE VALUE in engineering units is displayed but can only be configured for linear input type. INPUT BIAS—Used to compensate the input for drift of an input value due to deterioration of a sensor. Factory—Uses built-in calibration values (stored in read-only memory). When field calibration is performed. FLD uses the same calibration values as FAC. select the value you want on the input. Field—Uses calibration values stored as a result of the field calibration procedure described in Section 5.9 [factory setting = 0] FILTER 0 to 120 seconds No filter = 0 [factory setting = 0] 4-16 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Continued Lower Display Prompt LD CAL FAC [factory setting] FLD Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition LOAD CALIBRATION VALUES—This parameter is used to specify which set of calibration values you want to use. ATTENTION Until field calibration has been done. • Scale the input signal to the display value you want for 0%. Table 4-6 is continued on next page [factory setting = 900] [factory setting = −300] BIAS –99.9 to 999.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 4-6 Input Parameter Definitions.

error message “INP FL” will be on the lower display. Startup. Note that if the input fails. NONE UP [factory setting] NO BURNOUT—Failsafe output applied for failed input.5 for information about the interaction of the value of this parameter and the setting of switch 2 on SW6. Control algorithm will use underrange value when calculating output. Limit. the input reading will go Upscale and the lower display will alternate between: INP#.Product Manual 4-17 . the input reading will go down scale and the lower display will alternate between: INP#. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . If a LO limit is configured and the input opens. and INP FL. if a HI limit is configured and the input opens. ATTENTION Refer to subsection 4.Configuration. and Operation of Recorder with Display Table 4-6 Input Parameter Definitions. DOWN Note: For recorders with the FM Limit Approved Option the INPUT configuration does not provide a burnout selection. However. Continued Lower Display Prompt BRNOUT Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition BURNOUT PROTECTION (INPUT FAILURE) provides most input types with upscale or downscale protection if the input fails. Limit. Control algorithm will use overrange value when calculating output. UPSCALE BURNOUT will make the indicated PV signal go to overrange value when input fails. and INP FL. DOWNSCALE BURNOUT will make the indicated PV signal go to underrange value when input fails.

*Only selectable if hardware supports outputs and function prompt “CONTRL” in Control group is set to “ENAB” (enabled).) REMOTE SWITCH 2 EVENT—Records the digital input event for given channel. For a 2-pen recorder. Press FUNC key to select channel. Press the SET UP key until “PEN” appears in the lower display. CHART RANGE LOW VALUE—Enter a value that corresponds with the chart low range value for the pen. (Event toggles pen between 90 and 95% on chart. (Event toggles pen between 80 and 85% on chart. REMOTE SWITCH 1 EVENT—Records the digital input event for given channel.3. Table 4-7 Pen Parameter Definitions Lower Display Prompt PEN IN INP [factory setting] REM1 Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition PEN INPUT—What do you want the pen to record? INPUT—Records the input for given channel. [factory setting = 730] 4-18 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface. SETPOINT—Records setpoint for given channel.Product Manual 1/99 .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4. Pen group prompts Table 4-7 lists all the function prompts in the pen set up group. Press FUNC key to display parameters. REM2 OUT* SP* CHT HI –999 to 9999 [factory setting = 780] CHT LO –999 to 9999 CHART HIGH RANGE VALUE—Enter a value that corresponds with the chart high range value for the pen. The procedure for configuring each pen is the same.8 Pen Parameters Set Up Group Introduction The functions in this group are used to configure the pen(s).) OUTPUT—Records the output for the channel.

1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Table 4-8 Chart Parameter Definitions Lower Display Prompt CHTSPD Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition CHART SPEED—This is the time it will take to drive the chart one complete revolution. Press FUNC key to display parameters. LIN [factory setting] NLIN Linear (even) or Non-Linear (i. ATTENTION This prompt only appears for pen 1 configuration of a two-pen recorder. Press SET UP key until “CHART” appears in the lower display.e..9 Chart Parameters Set Up Group Introduction The functions in this group are used to specify proper chart function. CHART TYPE—Selection is based on the type of chart. Press FUNC key to select channel.Product Manual 4-19 .Configuration. 8HR 12HR 24HR [factory setting] 7DAYS – HR HR/REV 1 to 744 Hours 8 hour revolution 12 hour revolution 24 hour revolution 7 day revolution – hour revolution—specify Hours per Revolution selection at prompt “HR/REV”. Startup. and Operation of Recorder with Display 4. For a 2-pen recorder the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface. Chart group prompts Table 4-8 lists all the function prompts in the chart parameters set up group. J T/C or RTD) CHTTYP ATTENTION LIN chart type is automatically selected when input type is linear (as defined by value of input set up parameter “INTYP”). Appears only if – HR was selected at prompt “CHTSPD”.3. HOURS PER REVOLUTION—Set the desired chart speed.

Table 4-9 Totalizer Function Definitions Lower Display Prompt (actual current totalized value) Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection (current scale factor) Example: E1 Parameter Definition VIEW CURRENT TOTALIZED VALUE—This selection lets you view the current totalized value.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4. For a 2-pen recorder. Table 4-9 is continued on next page. ATTENTION In order for this prompt to appear. Control group prompts Table 4-9 lists all the function prompts in the totalizer function group. When the reset action has been performed. Selecting YES will reset the totalizer to zero. Press FUNC to select channel. In the example shown. RESET YES NO [factory setting] RESET TOTALIZER TO ZERO—This parameter is used to reset the totalizer to zero. Press SETUP key until “TOTAL” appears in the lower display. Press FUNC key to select the parameters. E1 represents the exponential 1 value that applies to the total (total times 10 ).10 Totalizer Parameters Set Up Group Introduction If the recorder hardware supports totalizer functions. This prompt appears first if “DIS” is the current choice.Product Manual 1/99 . TOTAL ENAB DIS [factory setting] TOTALIZATION FOR INPUT—This parameter is used to enable or disable the totalizer function. the parameter will be set to NO automatically. the functions in this group are used to calculate and display the total flow volume as measured by the input. the “RSTABL” function (described later in this table) must be set to “KEY”. 4-20 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . The displayed value is six digits with a configurable scale factor. See “SCALER” function prompt in this group for choices. ENABLE allows configuration of the rest of the prompts associated with totalization.3. the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface.

000.Configuration. and Operation of Recorder with Display Table 4-9 Totalizer Function Definitions.000) 8 1E8 equals 1 times 10 (100. Continued Lower Display Prompt RATE Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition RATE OF INTEGRATION—This parameter is used to select the desired rate of integration.000) TOTALIZER RESETABLE—This parameter is used to specify whether and how the totalizer value can be reset.EU (Engineering Units) per second MINUTE .Totalizer will be reset when remote (external) switch (digital input 1) goes to ON (contact closure). REM2* *Digital input card must be installed. 1 (displays as E0) [factory setting] 10 (displays as E1) 100 (displays as E2) 1000 (displays as E3) 1E4 (displays as E4) 1E5 (displays as E5) 1E6 (displays as E6) 1E7 (displays as E7) 1E8 (displays as E8) RSTABL 1E4 equals 1 times 10 (10.EU per DAY MDAY . 4 NO [factory setting] KEY REM1* NO . 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .000.Totalizer will be reset when remote (external) switch (digital input 2) goes to ON (contact closure).Millions of units per day TOTALIZER SCALE FACTOR—The totalizer displays the current totalized flow value (up to six digits maximum). This totalizer reset is independent of any set up of “REMSW2” in the remote switch set up group. Startup.Totalizer value can not be reset KEY . This totalizer reset is independent of any set up of “REMSW1” in the remote switch set up group.000) 7 1E7 equals 1 times 10 (10. The scaling factor selected here is applied to the totalized value when it is displayed.000.EU per hour DAY .EU per minute HOUR .Product Manual 4-21 . SEC [factory setting] MIN HOUR DAY MDAY SCALER SECOND . REM2 .000) 6 1E6 equals 1 times 10 (1.000) 5 1E5 equals 1 times 10 (100. REM1 .Totalizer can be reset from the keypad by setting the “RESET” parameter to “YES”.

All alarm group functions will be displayed. Press FUNC to select channel. Control group function "DBAND" is affected.11 Control Parameters Set Up Group Introduction If the recorder hardware supports outputs. Disables control. If control is disabled here. and no alarm group functions will be displayed. then the operator will be able to select the setpoint using the UseSPn operating parameter prompt.3.3.19 for special limit control configuration parameters. The second relay is available for alarming. Table 4-10 is continued on next page 4-22 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . (If configuring a limit controller.Product Manual 1/99 . OUTPUT ALGORITHM —Use to specify the type of output. For a 2-pen recorder.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4. RLYD RELAY DUPLEX—Type of output using two SPDT relays. No relay is available for alarming. CUR (continued on next page) CURRENT SIMPLEX—Type of output using one 4 to 20 mA signal that can be fed to a positive or negative grounded load of 0 to 600 ohms.) Control group prompts Table 4-10 lists all the function prompts in the control set up group. Table 4-10 Control Parameter Definitions Lower Display Prompt CONTRL Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection ENAB DIS Parameter Definition Enables control. RLY [factory setting] NumSPs ONE [factory setting] TWO OUTALG [factory setting] RELAY SIMPLEX—Type of output using one SPDT relay. the rest of the functions in this group will not be displayed. the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface. Its contacts can be wired for normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) action. see 4. Control group function “HYST” is affected. NUMBER OF SETPOINTS—If this is set to TWO. and alarm group functions will be displayed for Alarm 2. Press SETUP key until “CONTRL” appears in the lower display. The current output signal can be recalibrated as described in Section 5 to use any range within 4 to 20 mA to represent 0 to 100% output. Press FUNC key to select the parameters. the functions in this group are used to configure how the recorder will control the process. Its contacts can be wired for normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) action.

and Operation of Recorder with Display Table 4-10 Control Parameter Definitions. CONTROL ALGORITHM—Use this to specify the type of control appropriate for your application. FULL [factory setting] FULL—Current output is calculated over the full range 0 to 100%.Configuration. Startup. HALF—Current output is calculated over half the range (50 to 100%). It allows for the operation of a second ON/OFF output. In direct-acting control (set with parameter “ACTION” described below). With no relay action the controller output will read 50%. Continued Lower Display Prompt OUTALG (continued) Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection CurT Parameter Definition CURRENT/TIME DUPLEX (Relay = Heat)— Variation of duplex with current active for 0 to 50% output (tuning set 2) and relay active 50 to 100% output (tuning set 1). CURRENT RANGE—This parameter appears if “OUTALG” is set to “CurT” or “Tcur”. except that current is active for 50 to 100% (tuning set 1) and relay is active for 0 to 50% (tuning set 2). TIME/CURRENT DUPLEX (Relay = Cool)—Similar to CurT. ON/OFF [factory setting] ON/OFF is the simplest type of control. Control group functions “CURRNG” and "DBAND" are affected. The ON/OFF algorithm operate on the sign of the error. For example. (See “HYST” below. Tcur CURRNG HALF CTRALG continued on next page 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . When the error is negative. Control group functions “CURRNG” and "DBAND" are affected.) DUPLEX ON/OFF is an extension of this algorithm that applies when the “OUTLAG” is set for “RLYD” (relay duplex). For example. a control output of 50% would result in a 4 mA current output. and a separately configurable overlap (“HYST”) of the ON and OFF states of each output. the opposite is true. An adjustable overlap is provided between the ON and OFF states. a control output of 50% would result in a 12 mA current output. There is a configurable deadband (see “DBAND” below) between the operating ranges of the two inputs. The process variable (PV) is compared with the setpoint (SP) to determine the sign of the error (ERROR = PV-SP). the output is 100%. when the error is positive. The output can be either ON (100%) or OFF (0%). If the control action is reverse.Product Manual 4-23 . the output is 0%.

PDMR PROPORTIONAL-DERIVATIVE with MANUAL RESET—Use PDMR whenever integral action is not needed during automatic control. no integral (reset) action). Unlike ON/OFF control. Switching between manual and auto modes will not be bumpless in PDMR. PID A applies all three control actions (Proportional. Then the value specified using the tuning parameter “MANRST” (manual reset) is added to the computed output to determine the controller output. The amount of corrective action depends on the value of the proportional gain. • P (proportional only) control. Parameter Definition PROPORTIONAL-INTEGRAL-DERIVATIVE— PID A is normally used for three-mode control. by setting MANRST (integral term) to 0 and rate (derivative term) to 0 (tuning parameter “RATE T”). with PID A the output can be somewhere between 100% and 0%. Continued Lower Display Prompt CTRALG (continued) Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection PID A Note: PID A should not be used for proportional only action (that is. PDMR variations: If you select PDMR you can configure the following variations: • PD (proportional-derivative) control. • Proportional (gain) regulates the controller’s output in proportion to the size of the error (difference between setpoint and process variable). 4-24 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . The output is calculated with no integral contribution. Instead.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 4-10 Control Parameter Definitions.Product Manual 1/99 . • Derivative (rate) regulates the controller’s output in proportion to the rate of change of the error. Again. Table 4-10 is continued on next page. • Integral (reset) regulates the controller’s output in proportion to the size of the error and time the error has existed (duration). use PDMR with “RATE T” set to 0. This control can be tuned using the parameters in the tuning group. the amount of correction depends on the gain setting. Integral. by setting MANRST to 0. and Derivative) to the error.

[factory setting] DEFAULT DISPLAY—This selection determines the default display (input or active setpoint) on power up. The setting must be equal to or greater than the lower range of the input. For example. SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT*—This selection prevents the setpoint from going above the value selected here. the recorder will return to the automatic mode. SP HI -999 to 9999 [factory setting = 100] SP LO -999 to 9999 [factory setting = 0] ACTION DIR [factory setting] DIRECT ACTING CONTROL—The recorder's output is ON or increasing when the difference between setpoint and PV (PV–SP) is positive. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . MAN AUTO DEFDSP INP SP [factory setting] MANUAL—At power-up. and Operation of Recorder with Display Table 4-10 Control Parameter Definitions. The setting must be equal to or less than the upper range of the input. Continued Lower Display Prompt PWR UP Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition POWER UP CONTROLLER MODE RECALL— This selection determines which mode the recorder will use when it restarts after a power loss. the new setpoint will be 1200. RE *The setpoint will automatically adjust itself to be within the setpoint limit range. Table 4-10 is continued on next page. CONTROL OUTPUT DIRECTION—In what direction do you want the recorder output to go when the process variable increases. Startup. AUTOMATIC—At power-up.Product Manual 4-25 .Configuration. if SP = 1500 and the SP HI is changed to 1200. SETPOINT LOW LIMIT*—This selection prevents the setpoint from going below the value selected here. REVERSE ACTING CONTROL—The recorder's output is OFF or decreasing when the difference between setpoint and PV (PV–SP) is negative. the recorder will use manual mode with the output value displayed.

Only applicable for ON/OFF control. –5.0% of PV span [factory setting = 0] 4-26 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . This prompt is displayed only if the “CTRALG” (control algorithm) is set to “PIDA” or “PDMR”.0% This prompt appears only if control group function prompt “OUTALG” is set to “RLYD”. Continued Lower Display Prompt OUT HI Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection 0 to 100. “CurT”.0% of output for relay output -5 to 105% for current output Parameter Definition HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT—This parameter is used to specify the highest output to be used in Auto mode. or “Tcur”.0 to 25. [factory setting = 0] DBAND DEADBAND— Use this parameter to specify an adjustable gap between the operating ranges of relay 1 and relay 2 in which neither relay operates (positive value) or both relays operate (negative value). This is the difference between the value of the process variable at which the control relays energize and the value at which they deenergize.0 to 5.Product Manual 1/99 . [factory setting = 100] OUT LO 0 to 100. Table 4-10 is continued on next page [factory setting = 0] HYST 0. It is the difference between the nominal trip points of relay 1 and relay 2.0% of output for relay output -5 to 105% for current output LOW OUTPUT LIMIT—This parameter is used to specify the lowest output to be used in Auto mode. HYSTERESIS (OUTPUT RELAY ONLY) is an adjustable overlap of the ON/OFF states of each control relay. This prompt is displayed only if the “CTRALG” (control algorithm) is set to “PIDA” or “PDMR”.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 4-10 Control Parameter Definitions.

Configuration. Startup. FAILSAFE MODE AUTO Failsafe Latching Disabled – When the recorder goes into “Failsafe”. the control mode does not change. the control mode changes to Manual. The value used here will also be used as the output level if the input fails when input group “BRNOUT” parameter is set to “NONE”. When the cause of failsafe is removed. If the recorder was in Auto mode. Failsafe Latching Enabled – When the recorder goes into “Failsafe”. normal automatic control action resumes. Table 4-10 is continued on next page [factory setting = 0] FSMODE MAN 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Continued Lower Display Prompt FAILSF Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection 0 to 100% Parameter Definition FAILSAFE OUTPUT VALUE—Select the value you want the output to be when power is restored after a power down. When the cause of failsafe is removed. and Operation of Recorder with Display Table 4-10 Control Parameter Definitions. the output assumes the failsafe value. The output assumes the failsafe value if the recorder is in auto mode.Product Manual 4-27 . the recorder remains in manual mode.

The relationship between %PB and gain can be expressed as: GAIN = 100 %PB For example. Table 4-10 is continued on next page 4-28 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Therefore. Your choice here affects which tuning prompt. then the resulting change in the output due to proportional only control would be 15% of the output’s range. you must change the value of the associated tuning parameter (“PB” or “GAIN”) if you want to maintain the same control action.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 4-10 Control Parameter Definitions. regardless of whether PBorGN = PB and PB = 20. If you want the same control action you had before. Gain is the ratio of output change (%) over the measured variable change (%) that caused it. Another example: Setting PB = 50% will have the same effect as setting GAIN = 2 . This parameter is displayed only if the “CTRALG” (control algorithm) is set to “PIDA” or “PDMR”. you must change the value of “GAIN” to 5. or PBorGN = GN and GAIN = 5. is displayed. setting PB = 20% will have the same effect on control as setting GAIN = 5. PB Percent proportional band is the percent of the range of the measured variable for which a proportional-only controller will produce a 100% change in its output. suppose PBorGN = PB and the value of tuning parameter “PB” = 20. the value of tuning parameter “GAIN” will now be 20 (the value formerly assigned to “PB”). if the change in input were again 3% of range. If you change PBorGN to GAIN. Continued Lower Display Prompt PBorGN Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition PROPORTIONAL BAND or GAIN—Use this parameter to choose whether you want to specify the proportional term in the PIDA or PDMR algorithms in terms of percent proportional band or of gain. GAIN [factory setting] ATTENTION If the setting of PBorGN is changed.Product Manual 1/99 . then the resulting output change would be 6%. “PB” or “GAIN”. In this case. if the change in the PV input were 3% of the whole range of possible input values. For example.

Startup.Product Manual 4-29 . Continued Lower Display Prompt MINRPM Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection RPM MIN [factory setting] Parameter Definition MINUTES PER REPEAT or REPEATS PER MINUTE—Use this parameter to choose whether you want to specify the integral term (reset) in the PIDA algorithm in terms of length (minutes per repeat) or frequency (repeats per minute). This parameter is displayed only if the “CTRALG” (control algorithm) is set to “PIDA”. is displayed. you must change the value of the associated tuning parameter (“I MIN” or “I RPM”) if you want to maintain the same control action. Your choice here affects which tuning prompt.Configuration. you must change the value of “I MIN” to . The relationship between the two ways of thinking about reset is demonstrated by this example: 20 repeats per minute = 0. For example. suppose MINRPM = I RPM and the value of tuning parameter “I RPM” = 2.05 minutes per repeat. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . If you change MINRPM to I MIN. If you want the same control action you had before. and Operation of Recorder with Display Table 4-10 Control Parameter Definitions. ATTENTION If the setting of MINRPM is changed. the value of “I MIN” will now be 2 (the value formerly assigned to “I RPM”).5. “I MIN” or “I RPM”.

There is no change to the PID algorithm. fuzzy overshoot suppression minimizes process variable overshoot following a setpoint change or a process disturbance.3. This is especially useful in processes which experience load changes or where even a small overshoot beyond the setpoint may result in damage or lost product. “RATE T”. and “I2 MIN” or “I2 RPM”) are used for cooling control. and “I MIN” or “I RPM”) apply to heat control. 4-30 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Detailed instructions for using Accutune are provided in Appendix F. calculates the tuning constants and enters them into the tuning set up group. and begins PID control with the correct tuning parameters. The fuzzy logic observes the speed and direction of the PV signal as it approaches the setpoint and temporarily modifies the internal controller response action as necessary to avoid an overshoot. and allows retuning at a fixed setpoint.Product Manual 1/99 . When the recorder is used in a heat/cool application. “RATE2T”. The second set (“PB2” or “GAIN 2”.12 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group Introduction Tuning consists of establishing the appropriate values for tuning constants so that your recorder responds correctly to changes in process variable and setpoint. trouble-free on-demand tuning in the recorder. The tuning sequence will cycle the recorder’s output two full cycles between 0% and 100% (or low and high output limits) while allowing only a very small process variable change above and below the setpoint during each cycle. and the fuzzy logic does not alter the PID tuning parameters. This works with any process. Fuzzy overshoot suppression A parameter is provided to enable/disable fuzzy overshoot suppression. Refer to Appendix D for information on manual tuning. including integrating type processes. The recorder immediately starts controlling to the setpoint while it identifies the process. Accutune II Accutune II provides foolproof. You can start with estimated values. but you will have to watch the system to judge how to modify the values. The operator simply enters the desired setpoint and initiates the tuning. When enabled.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4. No knowledge of the process is required at start-up. The tuning group parameters described in this subsection are available only if: • your recorder supports control and • the control type specified in the control setup group using the “CTRALG” (control algorithm) parameter is “PIDA” or “PDMR”. Two sets of PID constants Two sets of PID constants are provided for duplex control. the first set (“PB” or “GAIN”.

1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . ATTENTION Appendix F contains instructions for using Accutune II for automatic tuning. Press FUNC to select channel. Startup.Product Manual 4-31 . the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface. and Operation of Recorder with Display Tuning group prompts Table 4-11 lists all the parameters in the tuning set up group. For a 2-pen recorder. Press FUNC key to select the parameters.Configuration. Press SETUP key until “TUNING” appears in the lower display.

RATE T 0. RATE T is used for heat control.The recorder will use fuzzy logic to suppress or mimimize any overshoot that may occur as a result of the existing tuning parameters. Table 4-11 is continued on the next page. See the description of control group parameter “PBorGN” for details concerning the two terms. Use the Increment or Decrement key to toggle status to TuneON. It affects it more when the deviation is changing faster.On demand tuning algorithm DISABLE . and you are using the recorder in a heat/cool application. PB or GAIN is used for heat control.0] RATE —Rate action affects the recorder’s output whenever the deviation between setpoint and process variable is changing. It does NOT change the parameters.1 to 999.08 or less = OFF [factory setting = 0.0] PROPORTIONAL BAND or GAIN—Which of these prompts is displayed depends on the selection made for control group parameter “PBorGN” (proportional band or gain). New PID parameters will be entered automatically when tuning is complete. Both proportional band and gain are ways of expressing the proportional component of control.9% or 0.1 to 999. TUNE DIS [factory setting] ENAB AT ERR no message under normal circumstances AbRT read only message displayed if tuning has been manually aborted PB or GAIN 0.00 minutes 0.Disables ACCUTUNE II ENABLE . and you are using the recorder in a heat/cool application.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 4-11 Tuning Parameter Definitions Lower Display Prompt FUZZY DIS [factory setting] ENAB Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition FUZZY OVERSHOOT SUPPRESSION FEATURE DISABLE . or “CurT” (current/time duplex).TuneOF will be displayed as a status message. or “CurT” (current/time duplex). ACCUTUNE II Error Code – Displays AbRT if “TUNE” has been aborted manually.) ATTENTION If control group parameter “OUTALG” is “RLYD” (relay duplex). See Appendix F. “Tcur” (time/current duplex). 4-32 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Disables fuzzy overshoot suppression ENABLE . ACCUTUNE II . Cooling control would use RATE2T described later in this table. “Tcur” (time/current duplex).08 to 10.Product Manual 1/99 . ATTENTION If control group parameter “OUTALG” is “RLYD” (relay duplex). (This is the “derivative” component of control.9 [factory setting = 1. Cooling control would use PB2 or GAIN 2 described later in this table.

Startup. Cooling control would use I2 MIN or I2 RPM described later in this table. or “CurT” (current/time duplex). Because a proportional recorder will not necessarily line out at setpoint. it is the same as if I RPM = 2. This reset value can be used to eliminate the offset and lets the PV line out at setpoint.5. The result is the same. and you are using the recorder in a heat/cool application. Reset adjusts the recorder’s output taking into consideration both the size of the deviation (SP-PV) and the duration of the deviation. The controller output is the computed output plus the value of MANRST.Configuration.Product Manual 4-33 . 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Table 4-11 continued on next page. if I MIN = . Continued Lower Display Prompt I MIN or I RPM Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection 0. ATTENTION If control group parameter “OUTALG” is “RLYD” (relay duplex). two resets are performed in every minute. and Operation of Recorder with Display Table 4-11 Tuning Parameter Definitions. MANRST -100 to +100 (in % output) [factory setting = 0] MANUAL RESET—This parameter is only applicable if control group parameter “CTRALG” is “PDMR” (PD with manual reset). (This is the “integral” component of control.) The amount of corrective action depends on the value of PB or GAIN. there will be a deviation (offset) from setpoint. The reset value specified here determines how many times proportional action is repeated per minute (I RPM) or the length (in minutes) of the reset action (I MIN).02] Parameter Definition RESET IN MINUTES PER REPEAT or RESET IN REPEATS PER MINUTE—Which of these prompts is displayed depends on the selection made for control group parameter “MINRPM”. I MIN or I RPM is used for heat control.00 [factory setting = 0. For example. “Tcur” (time/current duplex).02 to 50.

0] ATTENTION If control group parameter “OUTALG” is “RLYD” (relay duplex). “RLYD”. with a 10 second cycle time and an output value of 10%. and I2 MIN or I2 RPM — These parallel their counterparts already described. 4-34 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .1 to 999.08 or less = OFF [factory setting = 0. and you are using the recorder in a heat/cool application. CYC2TI 0 to 120 seconds [factory setting = 4] CYCLE TIMER FOR RELAY 2—This prompt will be displayed only if the control group parameter “OUTALG” is set to RLYD (relay duplex). CYC2TI is used for control of cooling. or “Tcur”. ATTENTION If you are using the recorder in a heat/cool application. and you are using the recorder in a heat/cool application. RATE2T. [factory setting = 1.08 to 10. CYC TI is used for heat control. these parameters are used for cooling control. CYC TI 0 to 120 seconds [factory setting = 4] CYCLE TIMER FOR RELAY 1—Use this to specify length of total cycle time for time proportional control (proportional control using relay action rather than current output). In the case of “CurT” and “Tcur”.00 minutes 0. In time proportional control the output (0 to 100%) signifies the portion of the cycle for which the relay is on (“duty cycle”) to achieve the desired setpoint.9% or 0.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 4-11 Tuning Parameter Definitions.02 to 50. I2 MIN or I2 RPM • 0. or “CurT” (current/time duplex). ATTENTION If control group parameter “OUTALG” is “RLYD” (relay duplex). the cycle parameters apply only to the time-proportioned output.1 to 999. “Tcur” (time/current duplex). Continued Lower Display Prompt PB2 or GAIN 2 Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection 0.9 Parameter Definition PB2 or GAIN 2.02] The following parameters are used for time proportional control.Product Manual 1/99 .0] RATE2T 0. For example. and are available only if: the control type specified in the control set up group using the “CTRALG” (control algorithm) parameter is “PIDA” or “PDMR” and • the output algorithm specified in the control set up group using the “OUTALG” parameter is “RLY” . Cooling control would use CYC2TI.00 [factory setting = 0. the relay would be on for 1 second and off for 9 seconds. “CurT”.

If the optional Setpoint Program feature is specified at time of purchase. then in addition to this single ramp capability. Press FUNC to select channel. Setpoint ramp/program group prompts Table 4-12 lists all the functions prompts in the setpoint ramp group. The additional prompts associated with the optional twelve-segment Setpoint Program are described in Appendix E.13 Setpoint Ramp/Program Set Up Group Introduction All models supporting control can be configured to ramp the setpoint between the current local setpoint and a final local setpoint over a timer interval of from 1 to 255 minutes. Startup. each with its own time interval. For a 2-pen recorder. the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 4-35 . Press SETUP key until “SPRAMP” appears in the lower display.3. and Operation of Recorder with Display 4.Configuration. you can also configure a ramp/soak profile containing up to twelve segments. Press FUNC key to select the parameters.

ENAB DIS [factory setting] For reasons of convenience. Make sure you configure a ramp time and a final setpoint value. FINL SP Within SP limits SETPOINT RAMP FINAL SETPOINT — Enter the value desired for the final setpoint. DISABLE SETPOINT RAMP — Disables the setpoint ramp. 4-36 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . SETPOINT RAMP/SOAK PROGRAM Available only with controllers that contain this option. SINGLE SETPOINT RAMP TIME — Enter the number of minutes desired to reach the final setpoint or a single setpoint ramp.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 4-12 Setpoint Ramp Parameter Definitions Lower Display Prompt SP RAMP Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition SINGLE SETPOINT RAMP — Make selection to enable or disable the setpoint ramp function. A ramp time of “0” implies and immediate change of setpoint to the final setpoint. ENAB DIS [factory setting] ENABLE SETPOINT RAMP — Allows the single setpoint ramp prompts to be shown. the information for the prompts when SPPROG is enabled are included in Appendix E— Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming Option. “SP PROG” must be disabled. TI MIN 0 to 255 minutes [factory setting = 0] [factory setting = 0] SP PROG ATTENTION “SP RAMP” must be disabled for SPPROG to be available. Allows “SPPROG” option to be selected.Product Manual 1/99 . The controller will operate at the setpoint set here when ramp is ended.

Table 4-13 Timer Parameter Definitions Lower Display Prompt TIMER PERIOD START L DISP Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection ENAB DIS [factory setting] 0:00 to 99:59 [factory setting = 0] KEY [factory setting] AL1 Parameter Definition TIMER . Press FUNC key to display parameters. any previous Alarm 2 configuration is ignored.7 for operation of timer. When the timer is enabled.r The time is shown on the lower display in hh:mm format along with a rotating “clock” character. Relay 2 will remain energized until the timer is reset. Elased time: If the “clock” rotation is counterclockwise. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . PERIOD . elapsed time is indicated. L DISP . START .14 Timer Set Up Group Introduction The timer option allows you to configure a timeout period and to select the timer start by either the keyboard (Increment or Decrement key) or Alarm 1. and Operation of Recorder with Display 4.r Press SET UP key until “TIMER” appears in the lower display.Select whether the Timer starts with the keyboard (Increment or Decrement key) or Alarm 1. The optional digital input can also be configured to the start the timer.Configuration. the timer is ready to be activated again by whatever action has been configured.3.Product Manual 4-37 . See 4.2.5.Select whether time remaining (TREM) or elapsed time (ET) is displayed for the timer option. it has exclusive control of the Alarm 2 relay. TREM [factory setting] ET Time remaining: If the “clock” rotation is clockwise. Startup. 59 minutes). The timer display is selectable as either “time remaining” or “elapsed time”.Configure the length of the timeout period (from 0 to 99 hours. Timer group prompts Table 4-13 lists all the function prompts in the timer setup group and their definitions.Use this to enable or disable the timer option. At timeout. time left is indicated. Alarm 2 is activated at the end of the timeout period.

There are two alarms available for each pen (assuming no relay is being used for control). Table 4-14 is continued on next page A1S1VA –999 to 9999 [factory setting = 100] 4-38 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . The selections are the same as A1S1TY.3. the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface.Product Manual 1/99 . Press FUNC key to select the parameters. In these cases only the prompts for the second alarm (Relay 2) will be displayed. high and low.0% to 100. one or both relays can be used for alarming. NONE [factory setting] INP DEV A1S2TY Same as A1S1TY NO ALARM INPUT PV DEVIATION of input from setpoint ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 TYPE—Select what you want Setpoint 2 of Alarm 1 to represent.0% is configurable for the alarm setpoint. An alarm is an indication that an event that you have selected during configuration (process variable. For a 2-pen recorder. A single adjustable hysteresis of 0. There are two alarm output selections. ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 VALUE—This is the value at which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt "A1S1TY" to actuate. You can configure each setpoint to alarm either high or low. then Relay 2 is used by the timer and prompts for the second alarm will not be displayed. Each alarm has two setpoints. Alarms group prompts Table 4-14 lists all the function prompts in the alarms set up group and their definitions.15 Alarms Set Up Group Introduction If the recorder hardware supports outputs. then Relay 1 is used for control. Press FUNC to select channel. If “TIMER” is set to “ENAB”. The appropriate value depends on what the setpoint has been configured to represent.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4. If “OUTALG” is “RLY”. and the prompts in the alarm group will not be displayed. If the “OUTALG” function in the control group is set to “RLYD”. Press SETUP key until “ALARMS” appears in the lower display. Table 4-14 Alarm Parameter Definitions Lower Display Prompt A1S1TY Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 TYPE—Select what you want Setpoint 1 of Alarm 1 to represent. both relays on the printed circuit assembly for the pen being configured are used for control. or if the recorder is a limit controller. for example) has exceeded one or more alarm limits.

The selections are the same as “A1S1TY”. and Operation of Recorder with Display Table 4-14 Alarms Parameter Definitions. ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 STATE—Select whether you want the alarm type chosen in prompt "A1S2TY" to alarm high or low. HI ALARM—Relay coil is de-energized when the PV is above the setpoint. LO ALARM—Relay coil is de-energized when the PV is below the setpoint. The appropriate value depends on what the setpoint has been configured to represent. ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 TYPE—Select what you want Setpoint 1 of Alarm 2 to represent.Configuration.Product Manual 4-39 . Table 4-14 continued on next page [factory setting = 100] A1S1HL HI LO A1S2HL HI LO A2S1TY Same as A1S1TY [factory setting] [factory setting] A2S2TY Same as A1S1TY A2S1VA –999 to 9999 [factory setting = 100] A2S2VA –999 to 9999 [factory setting = 100] 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . The appropriate value depends on what the setpoint has been configured to represent. ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 VALUE—This is the value at which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt "A2S1TY" to actuate. The selections are the same as “A1S1TY”. Startup. The appropriate value depends on what the setpoint has been configured to represent. LO ALARM—Relay coil is de-energized when the PV is below the setpoint. ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 VALUE—This is the value at which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt "A2S2TY" to actuate. ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 STATE—Select whether you want the alarm type chosen in prompt "A1S1TY" to alarm high or low. Continued Lower Display Prompt A1S2VA Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection –999 to 9999 Parameter Definition ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 VALUE—This is the value at which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt "A1S2TY" to actuate. ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 TYPE—Select what you want Setpoint 2 of Alarm 2 to represent. HI ALARM—Relay coil is de-energized when the PV is above the setpoint.

HI LO A2S2HL HI LO AL HYS 0. it will not deactivate until the variable is away from the alarm setpoint by a value equal to AL HYS.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 4-14 Alarms Parameter Definitions. When the alarm is ON. LO ALARM—Relay coil is de-energized when the PV is below the setpoint. LO ALARM—Relay coil is de-energized when the PV is below the setpoint.Product Manual 1/99 . ALARM HYSTERESIS—A single adjustable hysteresis is provided on alarms such that when the alarm is OFF it activates at exactly the alarm setpoint.0% of input span [factory setting] [factory setting] [factory setting = 0] 4-40 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . ALARM 2 SET POINT 2 STATE—Select whether you want the alarm type chosen in prompt "A2S2TY" to alarm high or low. HI ALARM—Relay coil is de-energized when the PV is above the setpoint. Configure the hysteresis as a % of input range span.0 to 100. HI ALARM—Relay coil is de-energized when the PV is above the setpoint. Continued Lower Display Prompt A2S1HL Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 STATE—Select whether you want the alarm type chosen in prompt "A2S1TY" to alarm high or low.

and Operation of Recorder with Display 4. Output. Press SETUP key until “AUX OUT” appears in the lower display.Configuration. You can also set the auxiliary output low and high scaling factors. Other prompts affected by these selections: “4 mA VAL” and “20mA VAL”.Product Manual 4-41 . OUT SP continued on next page 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Press FUNC key to select the parameters. Table 4-15 Auxiliary Output Parameter Definitions Lower Display Prompt AUX OUT Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition AUXILIARY OUTPUT SELECTION provides an mA output representing any of four control parameters. or Deviation. Press FUNC to select channel. For a 2-pen recorder. The Auxiliary Output is the same output as the Current Output and is not available if the control output algorithm = CUR. CurT. Startup. SETPOINT—Represents the value of the setpoint in units of PV.16 Auxiliary Output Set Up Group Introduction The auxiliary output set up group lets you enable or disable the auxiliary output selection which provides a milliampere output representing one of four control parameters: Input. The display for Auxiliary Output viewing will be in engineering units for all but output. or Tcur. Output will be designated in percent (%). Table 4-15 is continued on next page. FOR EXAMPLE: Type “J” Thermocouple (0 to 1600°F) 0°F display = 0% output 1600°F display = 100% output OUTPUT—Represents the displayed controller output in percent (%). Setpoint. Auxiliary output group prompts Table 4-15 lists all the function prompts in the auxiliary output set up group and their definitions. the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface.3. NONE [factory setting] INP NO AUXILIARY OUTPUT INPUT—This represents the configured range of input.

This value represents the deviation level that will produce 20 mA output.) *When Deviation is selected. 4 mA VA Low Scale Value within AUXILIARY OUTPUT LOW SCALING FACTOR— the range of the selected Use a value in engineering units for all selections variable to represent 4 mA above except Output. (Output can be between –5 and +105%.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 4-15 Auxiliary Output Parameter Definitions. Continued Lower Display Prompt AUX OUT (continued) DE Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition DEVIATION (Process Variable minus Setpoint)— Represents –100 to +100% of the selected PV span in engineering units. [factory setting = 0] 20mA V High Scale Value within the range of the selected variable to represent 20 mA Use value in percent (%) for Output. Use a value in percent (%) for Output. [factory setting = 100] 4-42 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . (Output can be between –5 and +105%. A negative deviation equal in magnitude to the Auxiliary Output High Value will provide a low end (4 mA) output.Product Manual 1/99 . only one operating parameter will be entered.5% NOTE: A deviation of 0°F yields an auxiliary output of 50%. Zero deviation will produce a center scale (12 mA) output. FOR EXAMPLE: Type “T” Thermocouple PV range = –300 to +700°F PV span = 1000°F Deviation range = –1000 to +1000°F If PV = 500°F and SP = 650°F then Deviation Display = –150°F Auxiliary Output = 42.) AUXILIARY OUTPUT HIGH SCALING FACTOR— Use a value in engineering units for all selections above except Output.

3. the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface. XmtDLY TRANSMITTER DELAY—Specify the minimum delay between the end of a received message and the start of the response message. Table 4-16 Communication Parameter Definitions Lower Display Prompt COMM ADDRES BAUD Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection DIS [factory setting] ENAB 1 to 99 [factory setting = 0] 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 [factory setting] 19. ADDRESS—Specify the pen channel’s address on the network. and Operation of Recorder with Display 4.Product Manual 4-43 .2K NONE [factory setting] 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms 50ms Parameter Definition COMMUNICATION ENABLE—Enable/disable communication. set the same baud rate and transmitter delay for both pens. Communication group prompts Table 4-16 lists the function prompt in the communication set up group. BAUD RATE—Specify the baud rate used by all devices on the network. For a 2-pen recorder.Configuration.17 Communication Set Up Group Introductions If the hardware supports the Modbus communication option. Startup. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . However. Press SETUP key until “COMM” appears in the lower display. ATTENTION Each pen channel must have its own unique address. Press FUNC to select channel. Press FUNC key to select the parameter. use the prompts in the communication set up group to configure communication parameters.

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4. the parameters in this group are used to specify what action the recorder will take if these “remote switches”. Remote switch group prompts Table 4-17 lists all the function prompts in the remote switch set up group and their definitions. triggered by some external event.3.Product Manual 1/99 . For a 2-pen recorder.18 Remote Switch (Digital Inputs) Set Up Group Introduction If the hardware supports optional digital inputs. Press FUNC key to select the parameters. Press SETUP key until “REM SW” appears in the lower display. the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface. 4-44 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Press FUNC to select channel. are closed.

When the digital input goes ON. The choices are the same as for REMSW1. (When the digital input goes OFF. the recorder will hold execution of the single setpoint ramp or the optional setpoint program.When the digital input goes ON.) HOLD . the recorder will start execution of the single setpoint ramp or the optional setpoint program.Product Manual 4-45 . REMOTE SWITCH 2—This parameter is used to specify what action the recorder should take if digital input 2 for this channel goes ON (switch contact closed).When the digital input goes ON. Startup.) Use of the second setpoint with a remote switch is independent of the number of setpoints specified with control group parameter “NumSPs”. and Operation of Recorder with Display Table 4-17 Remote Switch Parameter Definitions Lower Display Prompt REMSW1 Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition REMOTE SWITCH 1—Use this parameter to specify what action the recorder should take if digital input 1 for this channel goes to ON (switch contact closed).Configuration. NONE [factory setting] SP2 NONE . Output will not change until the operator changes it. (When it goes OFF. the controller will go back to Auto. (When the digital input goes OFF. MAN MNFS HOLD RUN TIMR REMSW2 NONE [factory setting] SP2 MAN MNFS HOLD RUN TIMR 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Controller will be switched to Manual mode when the digital input goes ON. using operating parameter “SP” as the basis of computing output. SETPOINT2 . RUN . the recorder will resume using “SP” for the channel.Controller setpoint used in Auto will go to the value of the second setpoint (operating parameter “S2” for the channel) when the digital input goes ON. TIMER .No remote switching action. MANUAL .Controller will be switched to Manual mode and the output will be changed to the value of control group parameter “FAILSF” for the channel when the digital input goes ON. using operating parameter “SP”as the basis of computing output. the controller will go back to Auto.) MANUAL WITH FAILSAFE . the optional timer will start.

and pen alignment parameters. after all the other configuration data has been entered.Product Manual 1/99 . Press SETUP key until “LOCK” appears in the lower display.3. Press FUNC key to select the parameter.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4. CAL—Locks out calibration and pen alignment groups. Calibration group functions are described in Section 5 – Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display. Pen alignment group function are described in Section 8 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment for Recorder with Display. CONF FULL 4-46 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .19 Lock Out Parameter Set Up Group Introduction This is the parameter used to lockout any unauthorized changes to the recorder’s configuration. All other configuration groups (except lock) are read only. Calibration and pen alignment groups are not displayed. they will not even be displayed. FULL— All configuration groups (except lock) are read only. Set this group last Because this group contains functions that have to do with security and lockout. All other groups are available for read/write. Table 4-18 Lockout Parameter Definitions Lower Display Prompt LOCK Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition LOCK limits access to one or more types of set up groups. Calibration and pen alignment groups are not displayed. Do not configure until all configuration is complete. NONE CAL [factory setting] NO LOCKOUT—All groups read/write. Lockout group prompts Table 4-18 lists the function prompt in the lock out set up group. we recommend that you configure this group last. calibration. CONF—Tuning and cycle parameters are read/write.

See Appendix E for a special worksheet used for this feature.3. Startup.20 Configuration Record Sheet Keep a record Enter the value or selection for each prompt on the configuration record sheet so you will have a record of how your instrument was configured.Configuration. and Operation of Recorder with Display 4. Remember that not all function parameters apply to every recorder and configuration.Product Manual 4-47 . The prompts for the optional 24-segment setpoint program option are not included on this record sheet. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder RECORDER TAG NAME_________________________________________ Group Prompt Function Prompt Pen 1 Value or Selection Pen 2 Value or Selection Group Prompt Function Prompt Pen 1 Value or Selection Pen 2 Value or Selection INPUT DECMAL UNITS IN TYP XMITTR LD CAL INP HI INP LO BIAS FILTER BRNOUT PEN IN CHT HI CHT LO CHTSPD HR/REV CHTTYP [value] RESET TOTAL RATE SCALER RSTABL CONTRL NumSPs OUTALG CURRNG CTRALG PWR UP DEFDSP SP HI SP LO ACTION OUT HI OUT LO DBAND HYST FAILSF PBorGN MINRPM FUZZY TUNE AT ERR PB or GAIN RATE T __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ n/a n/a n/a TUNING (cont’d) I MIN or I RPM MANRST PB2 or GAIN 2 RATE2T I2 MIN or I2 RPM CYCTI CYCTI2 SPRAMP TI MIN FINLSP SPPROG TIMER PERIOD START L DISP A1S1TY A1S2TY A1S1VA A1S2VA A1S1HL A1S2 HL A2S1TY A2S2TY A2S1VA A2S2VA A2S1HL A2S2HL AL HYS AUXOUT 4mA VA 20mA V COMM ADDRES BAUD XmtDLY REMSW1 REMSW2 LOCK __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ SPRAMP PEN TIMER CHART ALARMS TOTAL __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ _________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ CONTROL AUXOUT COMM REM SW TUNING LOCK 4-48 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 1/99 .

The exceptions are: • Control set up group contains special parameters for limit control in place of those described in 4.19 apply to limit control. the limit controller can be reset only by pressing the MAN/AUTO/RESET key on the recorder. ENAB 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .7 through 4. [factory setting] RST — Powers up in limit state. EXTERNAL RESET—Use this parameter to enable or disable resetting the limit controller (taking it out of the limit state) using Remote Switch 1 (digital input 1). and Operation of Recorder with Display 4. The setting must be equal to or greater than the lower range of the input.3. SP HI -999 to 9999 [factory setting = 100] SP LO -999 to 9999 [factory setting = 0] XRSET DIS [factory setting] DIS — When external reset is disabled. ENAB — When external reset is enabled. • Alarm 1 is not available.3.3. Startup. POWER UP STATE NORM — Normal limit control on power up. Most set up groups described in 4.* SETPOINT HIGH RANGE LIMIT —This parameter prevents the local setpoint from going above the value specified here.21 Limit Control Configuration Special configuration for control and alarms The DR4300 is available as a limit controller. Recorder will not begin normal limit control until RESET key is pressed. Table 4-19 Limit Control Parameter Definitions Lower Display Prompt LIMIT HI LO POWRUP NORM RST Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition TYPE OF LIMIT CONTROL [factory setting] HI — Limit action occurs when PV exceeds SP. SETPOINT LOW RANGE LIMIT—This parameter prevents the local setpoint from going below the value specified here. and are configured for the limit controller the same way they are for other recorders.11. The limit control set up parameters that replace those in 4.3. or by turning on digital input 1 (contact closed). The setting must be equal to or less than the upper range of the input. LO — Limit action occurs when PV is less than SP.3.Product Manual 4-49 . the limit controller can be reset two ways: by pressing the MAN/AUTO/RESET key on the recorder.11 are listed in Table 4-19.Configuration.

see Section 3. some are required during use. operator actions are required infrequently.4 Startup of Recorder with Display and Keypad 4. Some of the procedures in this subsection are required only initially. (For information on operating a recorder that does not have a display and keypad.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4. 4-50 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . mounted.) This subsection assumes that the recorder has been properly prepared.Product Manual 1/99 . AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD ! STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS.4. and wired in accordance with the instructions in Section 2.1 Overview Introduction This subsection provides procedures and reference information for startup and operation of a recorder having a display and keypad. and configured as described earlier in this section. Once the recorder is up and running. MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE SERVICING.

Slip the new chart under the pen lifter. Startup. and press it into place over the chart hub. ! Procedure Refer to Figure 4-4 to identify the basic chart plate components and follow the procedure in Table 4-20 Preparing the Recorder for Operation to prepare the recorder for operation.2 Preparing the Recorder for Startup Introduction Before applying power to the recorder. a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC power connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assemblies for the pens (behind the chart plate).Product Manual 4-51 . Table 4-20 Preparing the Recorder for Operation Step 1 2 3 4 Open the door of the recorder. Push down on the lifter to return the pen(s) to the chart. complete these preparation tasks.Configuration. and Operation of Recorder with Display 4. WARNING When the unit is powered. pen and time index. Pull up on the pen lifter to raise the pen(s) from the chart plate and remove the protective cap from each pen tip. ATTENTION Never move the pen arms when the unit is operating unless adjusting the pen alignment as described in Section 8.4. CAUTION: Do not try to rotate the hub Action Time index Pen lifter Large chart hub 24213 Figure 4-4 Basic Chart Plate Components 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Turn the chart until the desired time line on the chart is aligned with the time index on the chart plate and pen 1 before closing the locking clip on the hub.

The test will run for one complete revolution of the chart before it stops itself. See subsection 4. FUNC 2 3 4 Until INP 1 indicator is lit on the left side of the operator interface. This test is initiated using the keypad as described in Table 4-21.5.1.4. a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC power connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assemblies for the pens (behind the chart plate). Table 4-21 Procedure for Running the Step Test Step 1 Press Action/Result Make sure the cap is removed from the tip of each pen and the chart is installed.4 and Section 8 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display for more information about these diagnostic tests. toward the top of the board Apply power to the recorder.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4.Product Manual 1/99 . regardless of configured chart speed. Additional automatic self-tests At power-up the recorder runs self-diagnostics on the printed circuit assembly for each pen. ! WARNING When the unit is powered. (If you plan to store or ship the recorder.) Being careful of the shock hazard at TB1. Replace them if the recorder is taken out of operation. swing out the chart plate and set SW5 on the printed circuit assembly on the right (pen 1) to the setup position. with horizontal lines drawn by both pens at each 10% increment on the chart (see Figure 4-5). 4-52 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . However. the test can be terminated at any time by pressing the DISP key. which is independent of any chart settings.3 Running the Optional Step Test Introduction You can test the recorder’s mechanical operation by running a step test. The chart revolution for the test takes approximately 2 minutes. This test prints a step pattern. Procedure Use the procedure in Table 4-21 to run the step test. Table 4-21 is continued on next page. save the protective caps for the pen tips.

Lights INP 2 indicator (if recorder has 2 pens) together 6 7 FUNC You will see: Upper Display (value) Lower Display INP Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to test pen 2 operation.Product Manual 4-53 . 8 DISP Terminates the test at any time. and Operation of Recorder with Display Table 4-21 Procedure for Running the Step Test.Configuration. Continued Step 5 DISP Press You will see: Upper Display PASS Action/Result and MAN AUTO RESET Lower Display SLF TST Refer to Section 8 if step test fails. Check to see that the recorder is generating a step pattern on the chart as shown in Figure 4-5. At the completion of the test (after one revolution of the chart). Startup. the recorder will automatically return to normal operation. 24141 Figure 4-5 Typical Step Test Chart Patterns 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Chart step pattern Figure 4-5 is a typical chart step pattern generated by the recorder in the test.

) Table 4-22 Procedure for Setting Chart Time and Applying Power Step 1 2 3 Open the door.4. the only remaining tasks are: • setting the chart time and applying the power (see 4.4) • starting operation (see 4. Pull up the pen lifter to raise the pen(s) from the chart plate. The pen(s) will move into position and the recorder pen will start to track the value specified using the “PENIN” parameter in the pen set up group (see subsection 4. mounted.2 Set chart time and apply power Procedure To set the chart time and apply power.4.3. Push down on the lifter to return the pen(s) to the chart.1 Overview Introduction Once the recorder is set up.4. Turn the chart until the desired time line on the chart is aligned with the time index on the chart plate and pen 1 before closing the locking clip on the hub.4.4.4.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4.4.2) • checking the self-diagnostic tests (see 4.3) • checking the displays and keys (see 4. and the chart has been installed.4.4. Action Time index Pen lifter Large chart hub 24212 4-54 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . CAUTION: Do not try to rotate the hub 4 5 Close the door and apply power.5) 4.Product Manual 1/99 .4. follow the procedure in Table 4-18.8). (See also Figure 4-6.4.4. wired.4 Completing Preparation and Startup 4.4.

Configuration, Startup, and Operation of Recorder with Display

Figure 4-6 Setting Chart Time to Time Index 4.4.4.3 Diagnostic tests Tests run automatically When the recorder is powered-up, self-diagnostics are run by the software. As the tests in Table 4-23 are run, the display indicates whether the tests were passed or failed as described below.

Table 4-23 Power-Up Diagnostic Tests Lower Display RAMTST CFGTST (configuration checksum) CALTST (working calibration) Upper Display PASS or FAIL PASS or FAIL PASS or FAIL

Status of tests displayed As the tests are run, the lower line of the display shows which test is running. The upper line of the display indicates the status. If any of these tests fail, “FAIL” appears momentarily in the upper display, then a display test is run. The display changes to show the value of the process variable on the top line, and the error message for the failed test on the second line. In addition, if the control group parameter “CONTRL” has a value of “ENAB” when the test is failed, the message “FAILSF” (failsafe) will alternate with error message for the test, and the controller will be in manual mode. When the “FAILSF” message is displayed, it indicates that the recorder control output has been driven to the value assigned to the control group “FAILSF” parameter. By default, when the recorder is powered up the display will be for pen 1. Therefore, when the power up tests run, the “PASS” and “FAIL” messages will apply only to the printed circuit assembly associated with pen 1. However, in a 2-pen recorder the tests will also be run on the printed circuit assembly for pen 2. If the pen 2 assembly fails one of the tests, the message “P2 ERR” will be displayed, along with any error messages from the pen 1 tests. Section 8 contains additional information about self-diagnostics, and suggested remedies if a problem is detected.

1/99

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

4-55

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder

4.4.4.4 Check the displays and keys Procedure Use the procedure in Table 4-24 to run the optional display and key test.

Table 4-24 Procedure for Testing the Displays and Keys Press
SET UP

Result The recorder runs a display test. All the displays will light for 10 seconds, then the displays will look like this:
Upper Display KEYS Lower Display TRY

and hold in, then
FUNC

at the same time Press each key to see When the key is pressed, the lower display indicates the name of the if it works key pressed.* Key Pressed SET UP FUNC DISP MAN/AUTO/RESET Lower Display SET FUNC DISP AUTO INCR DECR

If pressing a key does not display its name, the display/keypad assembly is defective. Replace it as described in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies. * If no key is pressed for 30 seconds, the test times out and the recorder exits the key test.

Key Error message When a key is pressed and the prompt “KEY ERROR” appears in the lower display, the message is not associated with the display and keypad test. This message will be displayed when the operator presses a key that is invalid for the recorder’s configuration. The “KEY ERROR” message will be displayed during normal operation if one of the following conditions is met. • The parameter normally called up by the key is not available. • The recorder is not in Set Up mode, so the recorder can not respond to the key; press the SET UP key first. • The key is not valid because the recorder is not set up for control. • The key malfunctions; perform keypad test.

4-56

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

1/99

Configuration, Startup, and Operation of Recorder with Display

4.4.4.5 Startup procedure Procedure Use the procedure listed in Table 4-25 to start the recorder. Open the recorder door (if the recorder does not have the optional keypad on the outside of the door). Apply power and wait for the recorder to run its power-up tests.

ATTENTION
If FAILSF or another error message starts blinking in the lower display, refer to Section 8 for troubleshooting information. For recorders with control on both pens, be sure the INP ‘1’ indication is lit for steps 2-6. If INP 1 is not lit, press the FUNC key until “1” is lit when “INP” is displayed.

Table 4-25 Procedure for Starting the Recorder Step 1 2 Operation Pen check Select manual mode Press Action/Result For models without outputs, check that the pen is operating and skip to Step 4.
MAN AUTO RESET

Until “M” indicator is ON. Be sure INP 1 indicator is lit. If it is not, press FUNC key. The recorder is in manual mode and the Output (OT) in percent is displayed in the lower display. Calls up OT value in the lower display.

DISP

3

Adjust the output or

Adjust the output value and ensure that the final control element is functioning correctly.
Upper Display

shows the input value.
Lower Display

shows OT and the output value in %. 4 Confirm correct configuration.
SET UP

If you want to check the recorder’s configuration, follow the procedure described earlier in this section. If you try to change a value and can not, a lockout is enabled; see subsection 4.3.19. Table 4-25 is continued on next page

1/99

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

4-57

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder

Table 4-25 Procedure for Starting Up the Recorder, Continued Step 5 Operation Enter the setpoint
DISP

Press
Upper Display

Action/Result

shows the input (PV) value.
Lower Display

until

SP and the setpoint value for the selected channel. Adjust the setpoint to the value at which you want the process variable maintained.

or

6

Select automatic mode

MAN AUTO RESET

Until “A” indicator is ON. The recorder is in Automatic mode. The recorder will automatically adjust the output to maintain the process variable at setpoint as tracked by the pen trace.

7

Start up Controller #2

Until INP 2 indicator on left side of display is lit.
FUNC

For recorders with two control outputs enabled, repeat steps 2-6 for the second control output, but be sure INP “2” indicator is lit instead of INP “1”. Close the door and monitor the operation.

8

Exit Startup

4-58

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

1/99

Configuration, Startup, and Operation of Recorder with Display

4.5 Operation of Recorder with Display and Keypad
4.5.1 Monitoring Your Recorder
4.5.1.1 Overview Introduction In addition to the historical chart record, you can monitor the recorder’s indicators and displays to see real time values of inputs. If control is enabled, then setpoint, output, and deviation values can also be displayed. Set up values can also be viewed. Depending on the lockout status, configuration values may also be changed. As a background task the recorder runs self-diagnostics on the printed circuit assemblies for the pens as described in Section 8 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display. If a test is failed, an error message will be displayed as described in subsection 4.5.1.4. Depending on the recorder’s configuration, a “failsafe” output value may be used for control in case of malfunction, as described in Section 8. 4.5.1.2 Operator interface Display The indicators and displays on the operator interface let you see what is happening to your process and how the recorder is responding. Figure 4-7 is a view of the operator interface. A description of the displays and indicators is included.
Upper Display - four characters Normal operation - Displays process variable (PV) for the selected input channel. Configuration mode - Displays selection or parameter value. Data displayed is for input Channel 1 or 2 Indicates temperature units of PV on display.

INP

12 FC MA RL

SET UP DISP

FUNC MAN AUTO

Output relay 1 or 2 is ON, when lit.

OUT 1 2

Lower Display - six characters Normal operation - Displays selected operating parameter label and value. With totalization, shows totalizer value. Configuration mode - Displays Set Up group and function parameters.

Indicates controller mode: M = Manual A = Automatic When either of the remote switches is set for SP2, or when NumSPs = TWO L = Setpoint 1 (SP) active R = Setpoint 2 (S2) active 24278 Otherwise, neither indicator is used.

Figure 4-7 Operator Interface

1/99

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

4-59

Table 4-26 Meaning of Indicators Indicator INP 1 2 OUT 1 2 A or M Definition when lit Data displayed is for channel 1 or 2 Output relay 1 or 2 is ON Indicates the mode of operation: A = Automatic M = Manual Indicates the temperature units of PV: F = Fahrenheit C = Celsius L = Setpoint 1 (SP) active.Product Manual 1/99 . F or C R or L KEYERR (in lower display) 4-60 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Meaning of indicators During normal operation. the indicators will light for the reasons shown in Table 4-26. R = Setpoint 2 (S2) active Key stroke is invalid.

Press the DISP key to scroll through the displayed values listed in Table 4-27. To see the scale factor applicable to this value. Select which setpoint program to run.) The display shows only those parameters and values that apply to your specific model and the way in which it was configured. Displayed only if Accutune is enabled. (The input value will be in the upper display. then this label is always displayed. Table 4-27 Lower Display Operating Parameter Labels Label INP OT * SP * S2 * Description Process variable value of currently selected input. UseSPn * DE [nnnnnn] • You can press displayed. use this to select Setpoint 1 or Setpoint 2. If totalizer is being used. if the recorder does not support options. Displayed only if the program was set to run more than one cycle. the timer is not running. the totalized value will be in the lower display (no label).nn REC nn TuneON or TuneOF * If the optional timer is active. Each value will be labeled. see the totalizer set up group. Process variable deviation from setpoint currently being used. then only the label “INP” or the totalizer value will appear in the lower display. remember that any controller-related values displayed correspond with the lighted INP indicator. If the “clock hand” is not moving. For recorders with two pens. Setpoint program cycles remaining.3 Viewing the operating parameters Contents of display The upper display uses four characters to display the value of the input. or elapsed time (Hrs:Min) will be displayed. this setpoint is used only if control group NumSPs = TWO.nn) in hours and minutes.Configuration. and is configured to use this alternate setpoint in case an external event triggers the “remote switch”.Product Manual 4-61 . and if the program is not executing the last of multiple cycles. “1” means that the values apply to the pen 1 input channel and “2” means that the values apply to the pen 2 input channel. Currently executing setpoint program segment (N) and time remaining for segment (nn. and Operation of Recorder with Display 4. or if recorder supports digital inputs. or or to change the value or initiate some action when this parameter is 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . * * SPRG n * RUN or HOLD * N nn. the status “RUN” or “HOLD” will also be displayed as part of the display cycle. See Appendix F for detailed Accutune instructions. If a second setpoint is available (because control set up group NumSPs = TWO). either the time remaining on the timer (Hrs:Min). n = 1 to 4. you can view various real time values and setpoints in the lower six-character display if the recorder supports control. Startup.1.5. Controller output in percent for selected channel’s control loop Setpoint for selected channel Second setpoint for selected channel. In this case the other parameters listed below are not applicable. Press FUNC key to toggle between input 1 and input 2. If the optional Setpoint Program feature is currently executing a program. During normal operation. See Appendix E for detailed instructions for executing a Setpoint Program. Status of Accutune II. If the recorder does not support control.

and the run or hold action was initiated remotely. the recorder is executing setpoint program “n” as described in Appendix E.Product Manual 1/99 . In addition. If more than one self-diagnostic test fails. Unable to write to nonvolatile memory Failsafe value being used as output Two consecutive failures of input integration Input out-of-range Indicates error on channel other than the one on display. If any of these error messages are displayed. See Appendix E for details. Table 4-28 Error Messages Prompt CALERR CFGERR EEFAIL FAILSF INP FL INPRNG P1 ERR or P2 ERR RAMTST SEGERR Description Indicates failure of the calibration test. the recorder will display special status messages when optional features are active. Indicates failure of the configuration test. • If the lower display flashes “RUN n” or “HOLD”.1. the recorder is executing setpoint program “n”. an error message will be displayed if the operator tries to run a setpoint program in which the number of the ending segment is lower than the segment number of the start segment. Indicates that the number of the setpoint program’s end segment is lower than the segment number of the start segment. refer to Section 8 for information on correcting the problem. • If the lower display flashes “run n” or “hold”. an error message will blink in the lower display. Indicates failure of the RAM test.5. ATTENTION In addition to error messages. the display will cycle through the appropriate error messages. the recorder is in the process of automatically determining tuning parameters using the Accutune II feature described in Appendix F. 4-62 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . A list of background test error messages is in Table 4-28. If there is a malfunction. • If the lower display flashes “TUNING”. and the run or hold action was initiated locally.4 Diagnostic Error Messages Recorders with displays run background tests as described in Section 8 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorders with Display to verify data and memory integrity.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4.

INP (Input) indicator Remember that any value displayed for a 2-pen recorder will be identified by the “1” or “2” at the left of the display.2. Press the FUNC key to toggle between pen channels.4) • restore factory or field calibration values (see 4.2.5. reset the totalizer to zero (see 4.2 Operator Functions 4. the operator may also be able to change the setpoints.2.1 Overview Actions an operator can initiate An operator can do the following: • change the control mode (AUTO/MANUAL) and adjust the output manually (see 4.5.2. use this automatic tuning feature (see Appendix F) Note that being able to perform some actions depends upon how the recorder was configured and the features supplied on the recorder model. control mode and setpoint only apply to units having optional output relays that have been configured for use in control.5.6) • if the recorder has the timer option.2) • change the setpoint (see 4.2.5.2.5.4.4.5. For example. depending on the configured value of the “LOCK” parameter (see 4.7) • if the recorder is a limit controller. start the timer (see 4.5) • if the recorder has the totalizer option.2.Configuration.2.8) • if the recorder supports Setpoint Programming. run a program (see Appendix E) • if the recorder supports Accutune II.4) • run a key test (see 4.3) • check the alarm setpoints. Startup. indicating the pen channel to which the value applies.Product Manual 4-63 . and Operation of Recorder with Display 4.5. reset the recorder to take it out of the limit state (see 4.5. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .5.

5. The recorder regulates its output to maintain the PV at the desired setpoint. the recorder uses the local setpoint and automatically adjusts the output to maintain the setpoint at the desired value.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4. the recorder holds its output at the last value used during automatic operation and stops adjusting the output for changes in process variable. If the switch to manual is the result of an input failure sending the channel to failsafe operation. In manual.Product Manual 1/99 . Until “M” indicator is ON. • Manual: When switched to manual mode. The output can be any value between 0% and 100%. 4-64 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . In this mode you can adjust the setpoint as described in subsection 4. Table 4-29 Procedure for Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode Step 1 Operation Selecting automatic mode Selecting manual mode Press MAN AUTO RESET MAN AUTO RESET Action/Result Until “A” indicator is ON.2. the output value displayed when the controller first switches to manual will be the value of the “FAILSF” parameter in the control set up group.3.2. Procedure for selecting manual or automatic mode Table 4-29 includes procedures for selecting automatic or manual mode. the operator uses the keypad to adjust the output by changing the value shown in the upper display.5. The recorder holds its output at the last value used during automatic operation and stops adjusting the output for changes in setpoint or process variable. or Upper Display shows the input value. Lower Display shows OT and the output value in % for the selected channel.2 Changing Control Mode and Adjusting Output Manually Available Modes The recorder can operate in one of two modes. 2 3 Adjust the output in manual mode Adjust the output value while in manual mode. 4 Return to automatic mode MAN AUTO RESET “A” indicator appears indicating automatic mode. and for changing the output while in manual. • Automatic with Local Setpoint: In automatic local mode. be sure control has been enabled through configuration as described earlier in this section. • If you get a “KEYERR” prompt. This “FAILSF” value is expressed as a percentage.

Configuration.Product Manual 4-65 . Table 4-30 Procedure for Changing the Control Setpoints Step 1 Operation Select setpoint for the pen 1 channel (input 1).2. or 2 Select setpoint for pen 2 (input 2) FUNC Until “INP 2” indicator lights. Follow the procedure in Table 4-30 to change the control setpoints. Press until you see:. and Operation of Recorder with Display 4. until you see:. to change the setpoint to the desired value. Lower Display shows SP and the setpoint value for the selected channel. Startup. Lower Display shows S2 and the second setpoint for the selected channel. DISP Upper Display shows the input value. DISP Upper Display Action/Result shows the input value. to change the setpoint to the desired value. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . or 3 Return to input 1 parameters for display FUNC to light “INP 1” indicator If remote switch is set to SP2 then DISP will allow setting of second setpoint (S2).5.3 Changing the Control Setpoint Procedure The recorder can be set up for control on pen channel 1 and/or 2 as described earlier in this section.

Setpoint 1 value) A2S2 VA = (Alarm 2. Each alarm has two setpoints. There are two alarm output selections.19). Their order of appearance is shown below.4 Viewing and Changing Alarm Setpoints Introduction If the recorder hardware supports outputs. There are two alarms available for each pen (assuming no relay is being used for control). If a recorder output is being used for control. that output is not available as an alarm and the prompts will not appear.Product Manual 1/99 . Setpoint 1 value) A1S2 VA = (Alarm 1.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4. or 3 Return to normal operation Returns to normal operation. each alarm setpoint is configured to alarm either high or low. Table 4-31 Procedure for Displaying or Changing the Alarm Setpoints Step 1 Operation Access the Alarm Set Up group Press SET UP Action/Result Until you see: Upper Display SET Lower Display ALARMS 2 Access the Alarm Setpoint Values FUNC Until you display the desired alarm setpoint and its value. Upper Display The alarm setpoint value Lower Display A1S1 VA = (Alarm 1.5. Setpoint 2 value) Change any alarm setpoint value you select in the upper display. During configuration. one or both relays can be used for alarming. for example) has exceeded one or more alarm limits. Setpoint 2 value) A2S1 VA = (Alarm 2. The alarm setpoints can be changed by the operator if the alarm parameters are not locked (see 4. Procedure The procedure for displaying and changing the alarm setpoints is listed in Table 4-31.2. DISP 4-66 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .3. An alarm is an indication that an event specified during configuration (process variable. high and low.

7). The calibration values for each pen channel are stored on the printed circuit assembly associated with the pen. The procedure for calibrating an input is provided in Section 5 – Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display.Product Manual 4-67 . In addition.Configuration. Procedure Follow the procedure in Table 4-32 to select factory or field calibration values. The “LD CAL” parameter in the input set up group for each pen channel permits you to specify whether factory or field calibration values are to be used by the recorder. the value of LD CAL is automatically set to FLD at the completion of the field calibration operation. When field calibration is performed.3.3. Changing the input type also requires changing the settings of hardware switches at SW6 (see 4. provision is made for the storage of field calibration values. and Operation of Recorder with Display 4. 2 SET UP Until you see: Upper Display SET Lower Display INPUT 3 FUNC Until you see: Upper Lower LD CAL Present value (FAC or FLD) 4 or Select FAC (factory) or FLD (field).5.2. you must change the setting of the “IN TYP” parameter in the input set up group (see 4. Table 4-32 Procedure for Selecting Factory or Field Calibration Values Step 1 FUNC Press Action Select the desired input (indicator INP 1 or INP 2). Startup.5.5 Selecting Factory or Field Calibration Values Introduction Recorders are calibrated at the factory. Entering field calibration values does not affect the stored factory calibration. FLD uses the same calibration values as FAC. ATTENTION Until field calibration has been done. ATTENTION If you change the type of input used by the recorder. 5 Be sure the correct sensor is connected to the input terminals and resume normal operation. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .2).

2. Reset procedure Follow the procedure in Table 4-33.000. Action/Result 2 SET UP Upper Display SETUP Lower Display TOTAL until you see 3 FUNC If “TOTAL” doesn’t appear or prompt access is declined.Product Manual 1/99 .900. the totalizer will be reset by Digital Input 1 or Digital Input 2. 4-68 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . The value of the totalizer set up group parameter “RSTABL” (resettable) determines whether and how the totalizer can be reset. You will see: Upper Display NO Lower Display RESET 4 You will see: Upper Display YES Lower Display RESET 5 FUNC The totalizer will reset to zero. to reset the totalizer (return value to 0). where n is 10n .000. If the display reads “189 E3” then the totalized value since last reset is 189 x 103 or 189. The scale factor is displayed as “En”. For example: If the display reads “189 E0”.5.000. 6 DISP The recorder will return to the same state it was in before configuration (set up) mode was entered. If RSTABL = KEY. then the totalizer can be reset using the procedure in Table 4-33.6 Resetting the Totalizer Introduction The models having a display and keypad are available with an optional totalizer to calculate and display the total flow volume as measured by the pen channel’s input.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4. then the totalized value since last reset is 189 x 100 or 189. respectively. If RSTABL is set to REM1 or REM2. The value of the RESET parameter will automatically be returned to NO after the reset operation. Table 4-33 Procedure for Resetting Totalizer Step 1 FUNC Press Select channel. The displayed value is six digits with a configurable scale factor. If the display reads “189” E8” then the totalized value since the last reset is 189 x 108 or 18. check “LOCK” configuration.

This remote switch is independent of whether the timer is configured to start with the alarm or the keypad. the time indication will change.nn is: • 0. When the timer is configured to start via Alarm 1. or • the hours and minutes set on the timer if it is configured to show time remaining. Startup. then restarting the timer will involve pushing the Increment or Decrement key twice while the timer is displayed: once to reset the timer and de-energize Relay 2.7 Starting the Timer Introduction The DR4300 is available with an optional timer.Configuration.00 if the timer is configured to show elapsed time. one can be used to trigger the timer. it cannot be stopped with the Increment and Decrement keys (see Step 3 below). To stop the timer go into the timer set up group and disable the timer. At the end of timer period Relay 2 will be energized. 2 or You will see the “clock hand” start to move: • counterclockwise if the timer is configured to show elapsed time. This timer can be configured to be started by Alarm 1 or the keypad.2. • If the timer set up group parameter START = KEY.nn until you see where n. then when Alarm 1 toggles (goes inactive.5. then the timer will be restarted immediately. Procedure Use the procedure in Table 4-34 to start the timer. the timer can be reset (but not restarted) with the Increment or Decrement key.) Once the timer has been started. • If the timer set up group START = AL1. (If the recorder supports digital inputs. or • clockwise if the timer is configured to show time remaining. Table 4-34 Procedure for Starting Timer Step 1 DISP Press Action/Result o n.Product Manual 4-69 . and the second to start the timer. and remain energized until the timer is reset. 3 The timer cannot be stopped with the Increment or Decrement key. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . If the Alarm 1 relay is still energized when you reset the timer with the key. and Operation of Recorder with Display 4. then active again) the timer is reset and restarted. After a minute.

Manual and Auto mode do not apply to the limit controller.8 Resetting the Limit Controller Introduction The DR4300 is available as a limit controller. When the recorder’s controller goes to the limit state (relay de-energized). 3 MAN AUTO RESET Press the RESET key. NOT the reset switch SW2 on the printed circuit assembly for the pen channel. 4-70 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Output LED is on when relay is energized (not in limit). the operator will be alerted to the limit state by a message on the bottom line of the display. • If the input that triggered the limit state is on the pen channel being displayed.2. * This refers to the MAN/AUTO/RESET key on the keypad. depending on how the unit is configured) the controller goes to the limit state: Relay 1 is de-energized. • If the input that triggered the limit state is on the other pen channel. When the recorder detects that the input has exceeded the limit (or fallen below the limit. Reset procedure Follow the procedure in Table 4-35 to reset the limit controller (take it out of the limit state).* The limit controller will resume normal operation. Limit controller operator interface The operator interface on a limit controller is the same as that of other models having a display and keypad. Select the desired input (indicator INP 1 or INP 2).3. The Limit Controller may also be reset remotely. On each pen channel’s printed circuit assembly Relay 1 is used for limit control. the message will be “LIMIT”. The MAN/AUTO/RESET key functions as a reset only.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 4. monitoring the value of the input and comparing it to the configured limit value. the message will be “Pn ERR” (where n is the limit state’s pen channel). Table 4-35 Procedure for Resetting Limit Controller Step 1 2 FUNC Press Action Correct the cause of the limit state. see XRSET function in 4.21. Pressing the “FUNC” key to switch channels will display the “LIMIT” message.5.Product Manual 1/99 .

Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display 5. as well as a 4 to 20 mA current output for a model having a display and keypad.3). • Use the parameters in the calibration set up group to store field calibration values in the recorder’s memory (see 5. AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.6 Current Output Calibration See Page 5-1 5-2 5-4 5-6 5-10 5-12 WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD ! INPUT CALIBRATION MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS.4 Input Calibration Set Up and Wiring 5.2 Input Calibration Minimum and Maximum Range Values 5.1 Overview 5. • Set up and wire the input for calibration (see 5.1 Overview Introduction This section explains how to field calibrate analog inputs.2).Product Manual 5-1 .3 Input Calibration Preliminary Information 5.5. Because the recorder stores both factory and field calibration values for inputs in memory. • Prepare to calibrate (see 5.5.2. What’s in this section? Table 5-1 lists the topics in this section. MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE CALIBRATION.5 Input Calibration Procedure 5.5). you can easily select either factory or field calibration values for use by the recorder using the procedure given in subsection 4. To calibrate an input: • Determine the minimum and maximum range values to be used for calibration (see 5.4).Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display 5. Table 5-1 Topics in Section 5 Topic 5. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

5-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Select the voltage or resistance equivalent for 0% and 100% range values from Table 5-2.Product Manual 1/99 . use the FUNC key to select the input. Make sure the correct input is on display INP1 or INP2. Use these values when calibrating your recorder.2 Input Calibration Minimum and Maximum Range Values Minimum and maximum range values You should calibrate the recorder for the minimum (0%) and maximum (100%) range values of your particular sensor.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 5. calibrate each input separately. If your recorder has two (pens) inputs.

856 mV 22.234 mV 0.998 mV 19.8 to 1300 –18 to 1704 –18 to 1704 –184 to 371 –129 to 316 –18 to 2315 100 Ω ** 100 Ω (low)** 100 Ω (T)*** Milliamps –300 to 900 –130 to 392 –238 to 482 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA –184 to 482 –90 to 200 –150 to 250 25.Product Manual 5-3 .019 mV 1.00391 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .092 mV –5.111 mV 0.090 mV –0.472 mV –0.84 Ω 195.373 mV 44.334 mV –5.525 mV 0.341 mV –4.822 mV –1.769 mV 76.281 mV 17. These values must be adjusted for the actual cold junction temperature when using the ambient temperature method for calibrating thermocouple inputs.835 mV –6.773 mV 47.461 mV –0.060 mV 22.192 mV 68°F/20°C 100% 13.255 mV 71.30 Ω 38.113 mV 0.57 Ω 20 mA 20 mA 10 mV 100 mV 200 mV 1 Volts 2 Volts 5 Volts 5 Volts 10 Volts 10 Volts Millivolts 0 to 10 mV 0 to 100 mV 0 to 200 mV Volts 0 to 1 Volt 0 to 2 Volts 1 to 5 Volts 0 to 5 Volts 0 to 10 Volts 2 to 10 Volts *Range values for thermocouples are based on a cold junction temperature of 32°F (0°C).114 mV –0.513 mV 20.886 mV –0.18 Ω 64.000 mV –0.149 mV -0. ** IEC Alpha = 0.755 mV 0.400 mV 54.555 mV 50.789 mV 0.273 mV 0.79 Ω 0 mA 4 mA 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV 0 Volt 0 Volt 1 Volt 0 Volt 0 Volts 2 Volts 274.097 mV 15.771 mV 37.798 mV 1.00385 *** Alpha = 0.Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display Table 5-2 Voltage and Resistance Equivalents for 0% and 100% Range Values Sensor Type Thermocouples B E E (low) J J (low) K K (low) Ni-Ni-Moly Nicrosil-Nisil R S T T (low) W5W26 RTD PV Input Range °F 105 to 3300 –454 to 1832 –200 to 1100 0 to 1600 20 to 770 –320 to 2500 –20 to 1000 32 to 2500 0 to 2372 0 to 3100 0 to 3100 –300 to 700 –200 to 600 0 to 4200 Range Values * °C 0% 0 mV –9.96 Ω 175.075 mV 41 to 1816 –270 to 1000 –129 to 593 –18 to 871 –7 to 410 –196 to 1371 –29 to 538 0 to 1371 –17.

You will also need a medium size bladed screwdriver for general use and a small bladed screwdriver for use with the screws on the connector plugs. RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) • A resistance decade box.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 5. capable of providing stepped resistance values over a minimum range of 0 to 1400 ohms with a resolution of 0. • A calibrating device with ±0. and Volts • A calibrating device with ±0. Milliamp. • Two insulated copper leads for connecting the thermocouple extension wire from the ice baths to the precision calibrator. Thermocouple Inputs (Ice Bath) 5-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Inputs • Two insulated copper leads for connecting the calibrator to the recorder.02% accuracy. with ±0. • Three insulated copper leads for connecting the decade box to the recorder.02% accuracy for use as a signal source such as a millivolt source. Millivolt.02% accuracy for use as a signal source. • Two containers of crushed ice. • Thermocouple extension wire that corresponds with the type of thermocouple that will be used with the recorder input.02% accuracy. • Thermocouple extension wire that corresponds with the type of thermocouple that will be used with the recorder input.01 ohm. or an ice point reference.Product Manual 1/99 .3 Input Calibration Preliminary Information Equipment needed Table 5-3 lists the equipment required to calibrate various types of inputs. Table 5-3 Equipment Needed for Calibration Type of Input Thermocouple Inputs (Compensated Calibrator) Equipment Needed • A compensated calibrator with ±0.

Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display Disconnect the field wiring Depending on which input (1 or 2) you plan to calibrate. Refer to Figure 5-1 and follow the procedure in Table 5-4. Main PCA Pen 2 Main PCA Pen 1 7 TB2 TB1 TB1 7 TB2 24091 TB2 Figure 5-1 Location of the Input Connections on the Input Boards 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . and swing the chart plate out.Product Manual + – R 5-5 . open the door on the recorder. Depending on the input (1 or 2) you are going to calibrate. Table 5-4 Disconnect the Field Wiring Step 1 2 Action Remove the power from the recorder. disconnect the input connections from terminal block TB2 on the right edge of the applicable printed circuit assembly. See Figure 5-1 for the location of the circuit boards and input connectors. tag and disconnect any field wiring connected to the input terminals on the printed circuit assembly for the appropriate pen channel.

5-6 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . 2 3 Route leads (for example: copper leads or thermocouple extension wires) through a conduit hole in the recorder case so that you will be able to close the chart plate.Product Manual 1/99 . Startup.4. Close the chart plate after you have completed the applicable calibration set up. Refer to the following figures for corresponding set-up diagrams: • Figure 5-2 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Compensated Calibrator • Figure 5-3 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath • Figure 5-4 Calibration Set Up Diagram for RTD Inputs • Figure 5-5 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Millivolts. Do this procedure and then refer to the set up procedure and diagram specific to your input type. Volts. Table 5-5 General Calibration Set Up Procedure Step 1 Action Set up and connect the calibrator to the input terminals for the applicable printed circuit assembly in your recorder according to the type of input sensor being used. and Milliamps Inputs. and Operation of Recorder With Display.4 Input Calibration Set Up and Wiring 5.) General set up procedure Table 5-5 lists the general set up procedure for all methods of calibration.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 5. (See Section 4 – Configuration.1 General Calibration Set Up DIP switch settings Before starting the calibration activity. check that the input switches SW6 on the applicable printed circuit assembly (pen 1 or pen 2) are set correctly for the type of sensor being calibrated.

Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display 5.2 Thermocouple Inputs Using a Compensated Calibrator Refer to Figure 5-2 and wire the recorder according to the procedure given in Table 5-6.4. Main PCA Pen 2 Main PCA Pen 1 7 TB2 TB1 TB1 7 TB2 24825 TB2 Thermocouple extension wires Figure 5-2 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Compensated Calibrator 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Table 5-6 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Compensated Calibrator Step 1 2 Action Connect the thermocouple extension wire to the calibration source (see Figure 5-2). Connect the other end of the thermocouple extension wires to the TB2 terminals on the printed circuit assembly for the input channel being calibrated.Product Manual + – R + Compensated Calibrator 5-7 .

Main PCA Pen 2 Main PCA Pen 1 7 TB2 TB1 TB1 7 TB2 24092 TB2 Thermocouple extension wires Figure 5-3 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath 5-8 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .3 Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath or Ice Point Reference Refer to Figure 5-3 and wire the recorder according to the procedure given in Table 5-7.4.Product Manual + – R mV source + Containers of crushed ice Copper wires 1/99 .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 5. Connect the other end of the thermocouple extension wires to the TB2 terminals on the printed circuit assembly for the input channel being calibrated. Table 5-7 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath Step 1 2 3 Action Connect the copper leads to the calibration source (see Figure 5-3). Connect a length of thermocouple extension wire to the end of each copper lead and insert the junction points into the ice bath.

Connect the other end of the copper wire to the TB2 terminals on the printed circuit assembly for the input channel being calibrated. Table 5-8 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Calibrating RTD Inputs Step 1 2 Action Connect the copper wire to the calibration source (see Table 5-4).Product Manual + – R Decade box + Copper wires 5-9 .Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display 5.4 RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) Inputs Refer to Figure 5-4 and wire the recorder according to the procedure given in Table 5-8. Main PCA Pen 2 Main PCA Pen 1 7 TB2 TB1 TB1 7 TB2 24093 TB2 Figure 5-4 Calibration Set Up Diagram for RTD Inputs 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .4.

Main PCA Pen 2 Main PCA Pen 1 7 TB2 TB1 TB1 7 TB2 TB2 24094 Figure 5-5 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Millivolts. Volts and Milliamps inputs Refer to Figure 5-5 and wire the recorder according to the procedure given in Table 5-9. and Milliamps Inputs Step 1 2 Action Connect the copper wire to the calibration source (see Figure 5-5). Volts.Product Manual + – R Calibration source + Copper wires 1/99 . Connect the other end of the copper wire to the TB2 terminals on the printed circuit assembly for the input channel being calibrated.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Millivolts. Volts. and Milliamps Inputs 5-10 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Table 5-9 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Calibrating Millivolts.

Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to input circuits. be sure the recorder is wired for calibration as described in subsection 5. Startup and Operation of Recorder with Display). Do not switch the calibrator on/off while it is connected to the recorder’s input. check “LOCK” configuration.4. The calibration procedure for inputs 1 and 2 is identical. The displays indicate the input number. ATTENTION For Milliamp inputs. Table 5-10 Input Calibration Procedure Sequence Step 1 Description Enter Calibration Mode Press SET UP Upper Display CAL Lower Display INPUT Action/Result until you see If “CAL” doesn’t appear or prompt access is declined. Calibration procedure sequence The calibration procedure sequence for all inputs is listed in Table 5-10.5 Input Calibration Procedure Introduction Before performing this procedure. be sure the current source is at zero before switching on the calibrator. Apply power and allow the recorder to warm up for 30 minutes before you calibrate.Configuration. You will see: FUNC Upper Display DIS Lower Display CAL IN The calibration sequence is enabled and you will see: Upper Display BEGIN Lower Display CAL IN Table 5-10 is continued on next page 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display 5. Make sure “LOCK” is set to “NONE” (see Section 4 .Product Manual 5-11 . Press the FUNC key to change display as required (INP1 or INP2).

FUNC The value of input set up group parameter “LD CAL” is set to “FLD” (field). Repeat this procedure for the other pen. 5-12 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . The recorder begins to use the new field calibration values for this channel. 3 Calibrate 100% FUNC You will see: Upper Display APLY Lower Display INSPAN Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to the 100% range value for your particular input type (see Table 5-2 for voltage or resistance equivalents). then go to next step.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 5-10 Input Calibration Procedure Sequence. 4 Exit the Calibration Mode The recorder stores the calibration constants.Product Manual 1/99 . • Wait 60 seconds. if required. Continued Step 2 Description Calibrate 0% FUNC Press You will see: Upper Display APLY Lower Display INZERO Action/Result • Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to the 0% range value for your particular input type. See Table 5-2 for Voltage or Resistance equivalents. then go to the next step. Wait 60 seconds.

Table 5-11 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Current Proportional Output Step 1 Action With the power off. Main PCA Pen 2 Main PCA Pen 1 2 3 7 TB2 TB1 TB1 7 TB2 24189 TB5 1 Milliammeter _ + + _ Figure 5-6 Test Equipment Connections for Calibrating Current Output 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . capable of measuring 0 to 20 milliamps. connect a milliammeter’s leads to TB5 terminals.Product Manual 5-13 . Equipment needed You will need a standard shop type milliammeter. Calibrator connections Refer to Figure 5-6 and wire the recorder according to the procedure given in Table 5-11. with whatever accuracy is required.Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display 5. door open. tag and disconnect field wiring from the terminals on terminal block TB5 on the printed circuit assembly for pen 1 or pen 2 as applicable (see Figure 5-6). or at any other values between 0 and 20 mA. Observing polarity.6 Current Output Calibration Introduction Calibrate the recorder so that the output provides the required amount of current over the desired range. Close the chart plate: apply power and allow the recorder to warm up 15 minutes before you calibrate. The recorder can provide an output current range of from 0 to 20 milliamperes and can be calibrated at 4 mA for 0% of output and 20 mA for 100% of output. and the chart plate swung out.

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Procedure The procedure for calibrating the current proportional output is listed in Table 5-12. check the “LOCK” configuration. or Table 5-12 is continued on next page. Use the values shown below depending on the action of your recorder. 5-14 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 1/99 . be sure the correct input is . Use the values shown below depending on the action of your recorder. Press FUNC key to change input on display to agree with the control loop output to be calibrated. 2 Calibrate 0% FUNC You will see: Upper Display a value (approx. or 3 Calibrate 100% FUNC Stores the 0% value and. Table 5-12 Procedure for Calibrating Current Output Step 1 Description Enter Calibration Mode Press SET UP Upper Display CAL Lower Display CURENT Action/Result until you see If “CAL” doesn’t appear or prompt access is denied. 1800) Lower Display SPAN Until the desired 100% output is read on the milliammeter.” For display recorders with 2 pens. Make sure “LOCK” in the Set Up group is set to “NONE.INP 1 or INP 2 indicator lit. you will see: Upper Display a value (approx. 365) Lower Display ZERO Until the desired 0% output is read on the milliammeter.

Remove power from recorder and disconnect the milliammeter and connect output wiring. To exit the calibration mode.Product Manual 5-15 .Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display Table 5-12 Procedure for Calibrating Current Output. Continued Step 4 Description Exit Calibration Mode FUNC Press Action/Result The recorder stores the span value. DISP or SET UP 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Repeat procedure for the other pen.

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 5-16 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 1/99 .

4 Maximizing Pen Life See Page 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Routine Maintenance 6. It also contains tips for maximizing the life of the pens. This section provides instructions for replacing the chart and ink cartridge. What’s in this section? Table 6-1 lists the topics in this section. resulting in the pen being offset from the proper chart increment. Table 6-1 Topics in Section 6 Topic 6.1 Overview 6. Instructions for aligning the pens are provided in Section 7 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment for Recorder Without Display and Section 8 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment for Recorder With Display.Product Manual 6-1 .Routine Maintenance 6.1 Overview Introduction Unless the recorder’s location will expose it to dust. the DR4300 recorder does not require any periodic maintenance except the replacement of the chart and ink cartridges. including recommended practices if the recorder is used in a dusty area.2 Replacing the Chart 6. ATTENTION Humidity can affect the size of the chart.3 Replacing the Ink Cartridge 6.

Table 6-2 Procedure for Replacing the Chart Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Turn off the power to the recorder. Lift the chart from the hub.2 Replacing the Chart Procedure Refer to Figure 6-1 and follow the procedure in Table 6-2 to replace the chart. then open the door.Product Manual 1/99 . and slide it from under the pen(s) to remove it from the chart plate. Push down on the lifter to return the pen(s) to the chart.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 6. Turn the chart until the desired time line on the chart is aligned with the time index on the chart plate and pen 1 before closing the locking clip on the hub. Slip the new chart under the pen lifter. CAUTION: Do not try to rotate the hub 6 Close the door and apply power. Pull up on the pen lifter to raise the pen(s) from the chart plate. and press the chart into place over the chart hub. Pen arm Clip Ink cartridge Notch for pen tip Open clip Pen tip Time index Pen lifter Large chart hub 24214 Figure 6-1 Replacing the Chart and Ink Cartridge 6-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . pens and time index.

then open the door. Close the door and apply power. (If you plan to store or ship the recorder.3 Replacing the Ink Cartridge Procedure Refer to Figure 6-1 and follow the procedure in Table 6-3 to replace the ink cartridge. 3 4 5 6 7 Unclip and remove the purple (pen 1) or red (pen 2) ink cartridge from the pen arm.Product Manual 6-3 . 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Pull up on the pen lifter to raise the pen(s) from the chart plate. ATTENTION Be careful not to move the pen arm while removing and installing the ink cartridge. Remove the protective cap from the pen tip on the new cartridge and open its clip. Table 6-3 Procedure for Replacing the Ink Cartridge Step 1 2 Action Remove the power from the recorder. save the protective cap.) Slide the new cartridge onto the pen arm so that its tip fits into the notch at the end of the pen arm and close the clip to secure the cartridge to the pen arm. Push down the pen lifter to return the pen tip to the chart.Routine Maintenance 6.

clean dry place where the temperature does not exceed 40°C (104°F) and the humidity is below 65% RH. Never let the pen tip ride on the chart plate when the paper is not present. 5 6 7 8 9 6-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Do not expose the pen tip and chart paper to abrasive chemicals or dust that cause excessive pen wear. Use the pen lifter to raise the arm when changing the paper. Keep the door closed while recording. This is more important when the recorder is located in a dusty environment and no ‘clean air purge’ is used.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 6.4 Maximizing Pen Life Steps for maximizing pen life Table 6-4 lists steps that will help maximize the life of recorder pens. Be sure the chart hub assembly is pushed onto the motor shaft so that it is flush with the chart plate. Periodically clean the pen arm using a cotton swab dipped in alcohol. Table 6-4 Maximizing Pen Life Step 1 2 3 4 Action Store the chart paper in a cool. Be sure that the chart paper lays flat against the chart plate. Any ripple in the paper will cause light pen printing. provide a positive ‘clean air purge’ to minimize dust particle accumulation on the chart paper. If the recorder is used in a dusty atmosphere. Always cover the pen arm tip with its protective cap when storing or shipping the recorder.Product Manual 1/99 .

1 Overview 7. Table 7-1 Topics in Section 7 Topic 7. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .3 Troubleshooting Procedures 7.Product Manual 7-1 . • While troubleshooting is straightforward.Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder without Display 7. Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Basic Recorder without Display 7. SEE THE SHOCK HAZARD WARNING BELOW.4 Alignment of Pen at Zero and 100% See Page 7-1 7-3 7-4 7-9 WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD ! TROUBLESHOOTING MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS.1 Overview Introduction This section explains how to use observable symptoms of failure to troubleshoot the recorder models that do not have a display. What’s in this section? Table 7-1 lists the topics in this section. MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE SERVICING. This section also includes instructions for aligning the pens. we recommend that only trained service technicians repair the recorder.2 Observable Symptoms of Failure 7. AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • To reduce recorder down-time. this section enables tracing trouble to a printed circuit assembly (PCA)/hardware assembly level rather than to an individual component.

if necessary.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Types of problems Instrument performance can be adversely affected by installation and application problems as well as by hardware problems. completely isolate the recorder from all field wiring. follow the procedures in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies. Appendix A – How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments provides additional relevant information. Hardware and software related problems Observe the symptoms to identify typical failures which may occur in the recorder. and use the information in this section to solve them. • Installation related problems • Application related problems • Hardware and software related problems Installation related problems Read Section 2 – Installation to make sure the DR4300 has been properly installed. alarms. output. Use calibration sources to simulate PV and check all recorder and control functions. that is. Application related problems Review the application of the recorder. Follow the troubleshooting procedures to correct the problems. 7-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . ATTENTION System noise induced into the recorder may result in transient abnormalities in performance.Product Manual 1/99 . We recommend that you investigate the problems in the order listed below. etc. If system noise is suspected. If replacement of any part is required. chart trace. then. pen functions. direct your questions to the local sales office.

3.2 Observable Symptoms of Failure Introduction If erratic operation is observed.2 7. See Subsection 7. Recorder operation is normal but pen trace is incorrect.3.3.3. Chart rotates at wrong speed or will not rotate (pen indication correct).Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder without Display 7.3.4 7. then follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure in 7. refer to the failure symptoms in Table 7-2.Product Manual 7-3 .3 7. Pen remains at high end of range when input signal is low. Symptoms Compare your recorder’s symptoms with those shown in Table 7-2 and refer to the indicated subsection for the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.5 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Table 7-2 Observable Symptoms of Failure Symptom Recorder will not operate.

WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD ! TROUBLESHOOTING MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS.3. Equipment needed You will need a voltmeter to troubleshoot the symptoms listed in the tables that follow. or a cross-reference to instructions elsewhere in the manual.1 Overview Introduction The troubleshooting procedures for the observable symptoms of failure are presented in the same order as they appear in Table 7-2.Product Manual 1/99 . Safety precautions Exercise appropriate safety precautions when troubleshooting the recorder operation.3 Troubleshooting Procedures 7. 7-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . as well as instructions for accomplishing the task.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 7. Each procedure includes what to do if you have that particular problem. AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE SERVICING.

. Check the system for brown-outs. Refer to Section 2 – Installation. etc. Table 7-3 Troubleshooting Recorder Failure Symptoms Step 1 What to do Check the supply voltage. and conformance to installation instructions. Replace the PCA for pen 1.3.Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder without Display 7. 4 Refer to the replacement procedures in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies. Refer to AC wiring procedures in Section 2 – Installation. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . heavy load switching. 2 3 Check the connections to TB1 on the pen 1 PCA.2 Recorder Failure Troubleshooting Procedure Table 7-3 explains how to troubleshoot recorder failure symptoms.Product Manual 7-5 . How to do it or where to find the instructions Measure the line voltage across the line and neutral connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assembly (PCA) on the right (for pen 1).

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder

7.3.3 Pen Trace Troubleshooting
Procedure Table 7-4 explains how to troubleshoot a pen trace problem.

Table 7-4 Troubleshooting Pen Trace Failure Symptoms Step 1 What to do Check the ink cartridge for proper installation. How to do it or where to find the instructions Reposition or replace the ink cartridge as described in Section 6 – Routine Maintenance. If the pen arm is severely warped, replace the pen arm as described in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies. 2 Check that the chart agrees with the actuation type and chart set up. Replace wrong chart with correct chart. Refer to Section 3 – Configuration, Startup, and Operation of Recorder without Display for instructions for viewing the configuration. See Section 6 – Routine Maintenance for instructions for replacing the chart. 3 4 Check the pen alignment. Look at printed circuit assembly (PCA) for the pen to see if the red* LED is lit. This LED is lit when the PCA failed a self-diagnostic, or an out-of-range input has been detected. (Flashing green LED is OK, it indicates that the processor is active.) Check the sensor for the proper type and its ability to function. Follow the procedure in subsection 7.4. Press the reset switch SW2. The PCA will be initialized. If the problem was a software error, the error may be cleared by the reset.

*For Recorders with a display, the red LED is used by an internal control signal and is not a fault indicator.

5

Verify the input configuration data and operation of the sensor. Measure input signal at TB2 or apply calibration source to verify input signal.

6

Replace the servo plate assembly.

Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies. Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies.

7

Replace the printed circuit assembly for the pen with the problem.

7-6

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

1/99

Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder without Display

7.3.4 Chart Rotation Troubleshooting
Procedure Table 7-5 explains how to troubleshoot a chart rotation problem.

Table 7-5 Troubleshooting Chart Rotation Failure Symptoms Step 1 What to do Check the chart installation. How to do it or where to find the instructions Turn the chart until the desired time line on the chart is aligned with the time index on the chart plate and pen 1 before closing the locking clip on the hub. Push down on the lifter to return the pen(s) to the chart. CAUTION: Do not try to rotate the hub 2 Check the settings of the configuration switches. Change settings if incorrect for application. Run the step test. Refer to Section 3 – Configuration, Startup, and Operation of Recorder without Display. Refer to Section 3 – Configuration, Startup, and Operation of Recorder without Display. (subsection 3.3.3) Power down the recorder, then visually examine the plug and reseat it. Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies. Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies.

3

4

Check the motor cable plug connection at connector P3 on the printed circuit assembly for pen 1. Replace the chart motor.

5

6

Replace the printed circuit board for pen 1.

1/99

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

7-7

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder

7.3.5 Troubleshooting Erratic Pen Movement
Procedure Table 7-6 explains what to do if the pen remains at the high end of range when the input signal is low.

Table 7-6 Troubleshooting Erratic Pen Movement Symptoms Step 1 What to do Check the sensor and lead wires for continuity. Check the connections to TB2 on the printed circuit assembly for the pen with the problem. How to do it or where to find the instructions Replace the sensor lead wires as needed. Tighten the connections.

2 3

Check the pen and input configuration Refer to Section 3 – Configuration, Startup, data. and Operation of Recorder without Display. Run step test. Refer to Section 3 – Configuration, Startup, and Operation of Recorder without Display. (subsection 3.3.3) Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies. Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies.

4

Replace the servo plate assembly.

5

Replace the printed circuit assembly for the pen having the problem.

7-8

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

1/99

Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder without Display

7.4 Alignment of Pen at Zero and 100%
Procedure You can align the pens to the zero and 100% positions on the chart using the procedure in Table 7-7. If humidity causes the chart to change size, repeat the procedure as needed.

WARNING
When the recorder is powered, a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at AC power connections TB1 on each pen channel’s printed circuit assembly.

!

Table 7-7 Procedure for Pen Alignment Step 1 Action Place run switch SW5 to the setup position (toward the top of the board) on the pen’s PCA. Graphic

See Figure 3-1 for location of SW5 (to the right of TB1). 2 Press SW3 and SW4 simultaneously and release them. The pen will move downscale toward the hub and be positioned at the previously set 0% point on the chart within approximately 10 seconds. If the pen tip is greatly out of position, follow Steps 3 through 7. (Unless a pen arm has been replaced, this probably will not be necessary.) If pen position requires only minor adjustment, go to Step 8. 3 4 Turn off the power to the recorder before the pen begins to move upscale (approximately 10 seconds). To place the pen tips in approximately the correct position, loosen the screw holding the pen 1 arm to the servo shaft and move the pen arm to access the locking screw for the pen 2 arm (if applicable). Align the tip of pen 2 with the zero line on the chart and tighten the locking screw. Align the tip of pen 1 with the zero line on the chart and tighten the locking screw. Turn on the power and repeat Step 2. Table 7-7 continued on the next page See Figure 3-1 for location of SW3 and SW4.

5 6 7

1/99

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

7-9

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder

Table 7-7 Procedure for Pen Alignment, Continued Step 8 Action To fine-tune the alignment of a pen, press the raise switch SW4 or lower switch SW3 on its PCA until the pen tip is aligned with the zero line on the chart. Approximately 10 seconds after the last press of the raise or lower switch the pen will move to the previously set 100% point. 9 To fine-tune the alignment of the pen, press the raise switch SW4 or lower switch SW3 until the pen tip is aligned with the 100% line on the chart. Approximately 10 seconds after the last press of the raise or lower switch the pen will move downscale as described in Step 2. 10 To exit the pen alignment cycle place SW5 to the run position (toward the bottom of the board). Pen will return to normal operation. See Figure 3-1 for the location of SW3 and SW4. Graphic See Figure 3-1 for the location of SW3 and SW4.

7-10

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

1/99

AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display 8.1 Overview Introduction This section explains how to troubleshoot the recorder models having display and keypad.2 Troubleshooting Aids 8.Product Manual 8-1 . SEE THE SHOCK HAZARD WARNING BELOW.4 Observable Symptoms of Failure 8. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . • While troubleshooting is straightforward. Troubleshooting uses self-diagnostic test results and error messages as well as some observable symptoms of failure.Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display 8. MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE SERVICING. • To reduce recorder down-time.6 Alignment of Pen at Zero and Span See Page 8-1 8-3 8-4 8-10 8-11 8-21 WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD ! TROUBLESHOOTING MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS.3 Self Diagnostics 8.1 Overview 8. we recommend that only trained service technicians repair the recorder.5 Troubleshooting Procedures 8. This section also includes instructions for aligning the pens What’s in this section? Table 8-1 lists the topics in this section. Table 8-1 Topics in Section 8 Topic 8. this section enables tracing trouble to a printed circuit assembly (PCA)/hardware assembly level rather than to an individual component.

pen functions. Follow the troubleshooting procedures to correct the problems. and use the information in this section to solve them. Application related problems Review the application of the recorder. ATTENTION System noise induced into the recorder will result in diagnostic error messages recurring. completely isolate the recorder from all field wiring. 8-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . • Installation related problems • Application related problems • Hardware and software related problems Installation related problems Read Section 2 – Installation to make sure the recorder has been properly installed. direct your questions to the local sales office. We recommend that you investigate the problems in the order listed below.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Types of problems Instrument performance can be adversely affected by installation and application problems as well as by hardware problems. If the diagnostic error messages can be cleared. it indicates a “soft” failure and is probably noise related. Use calibration sources to simulate PV and check all recorder and control functions. If system noise is suspected. If replacement of any part is required. that is. alarms. then. if necessary.Product Manual 1/99 . Hardware and software related problems Use the troubleshooting error messages and observable symptoms to identify typical failures which may occur in the recorder. Appendix A – How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments provides additional relevant information. etc. output. follow the procedures in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies. chart trace.

Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display

8.2 Troubleshooting Aids
Self diagnostics The software runs self-diagnostic tests to monitor the recorder’s general state. Tests are run when the unit is powered up and as a background task during operation. When tests run at power-up, the progress of the tests will be displayed as described in subsection 8.3.1. When the tests run in the background during normal operation, the display will not indicate the progress of the tests. However, if the recorder fails a test, an error message will appear on the lower line of the display as described in subsection 8.3.4. Table 8-5 lists all the possible error messages, the reason for each, and how to correct the problem.

Observable symptoms of failure Other failures may occur that deal with the power, pen functions, chart rotation, output, or alarms. If erratic operation is observed, refer to the failure symptoms in Table 8-6, then follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure in 8.5.

Check Installation If a set of symptoms still persists, refer to Section 2 – Installation and Section 4 – Configuration, Startup, and Operation of Recorder with Display to ensure that the recorder has been installed and set up properly.

Determine the software version before calling for technical support Before calling for technical support, follow the procedure in Table 8-2 to determine the version of the software in the recorder. This version information will assist the support team in diagnosing the problem. Table 8-2 Procedure for Identifying the Software Version Step 1 Operation Select STATUS Set Up Group Press
SET UP

Action/Result Until you see:
Upper Display READ Lower Display STATUS

2

Read the software version

Until you see:
FUNC
Upper Display

Lower Display VERSION

Software version Number

Please give this number to the Customer Support person assisting you.

1/99

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

8-3

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder

8.3 Self Diagnostics
8.3.1 Power up tests
Tests run automatically When the recorder is powered-up, self-diagnostics are run by the software. As the tests in Table 8-3 are run, the display indicates whether the tests were passed or failed as described below.

Table 8-3 Power-Up Diagnostic Tests Lower Display RAMTST CFGTST (configuration checksum) CALTST (working calibration) Upper Display PASS or FAIL PASS or FAIL PASS or FAIL

Status of tests displayed As the tests are run, the lower line of the display shows which test is running. The upper line of the display indicates the status. If any of these tests fail, “FAIL” appears momentarily in the upper display, then a display test is run. The display changes to show the value of the process variable on the top line, and the error message for the failed test on the second line. In addition, if the control group parameter “CONTRL” has a value of “ENAB” when the test is failed, the message “FAILSF” (failsafe) will alternate with error message for the test, and the controller will be in manual mode. When the “FAILSF” message is displayed, it indicates that the recorder control output has been driven to the value assigned to the control group “FAILSF” parameter. By default, when the recorder is powered up the display will be for pen 1. Therefore, when the power up tests run, the “PASS” and “FAIL” messages will apply only to the printed circuit assembly associated with pen 1. However, in a 2-pen recorder the tests will also be run on the printed circuit assembly for pen 2. If the pen 2 assembly fails one of the tests, the message “P2 ERR” will be displayed, along with any error messages from the pen 1 tests.

8-4

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

1/99

Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display

8.3.2 View Status of Tests
Procedure The status of self-diagnostic tests can be viewed using the procedure in Table 8-4. Note that “FAILSF” is not a test. When “FAILSF YES” is displayed, it is an indication that the recorder is using the value of the control set up group “FAILSF” parameter as the output value because the recorder failed a self-test, or because the recorder detected an input failure while the input set up parameter “BRNOUT” = “NONE”. See Table 8-5 for more information about self-diagnostics, and for recommended actions when a test fails.

Table 8-4 Procedure for Displaying the Results of Self-Diagnostics Step 1 Operation Select status set up Group Press
SET UP

Action/Result Until you see:
Upper Display READ Lower Display STATUS

2

Read the status tests results

Until you see:
FUNC
Upper Display NO or YES Lower Display FAILSF

YES indicates a failure

• Successive presses of the FUNC key will display the results of the status tests (PASS or FAIL) in the following order: RAMTST CFGTST CALTST • Identify the problem and correct the failure as shown in Table 8-5.

1/99

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

8-5

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder

8.3.3 Background Tests
Tests run automatically During normal operation of the recorder, tests of the configuration and calibration run in the background. If the recorder fails one of the tests, the appropriate message will be displayed as described in subsection 8.3.4.

8.3.4 Error Messages
All relevant messages are displayed If the recorder fails one or more tests, the operator is alerted by the display of one or more messages. One message is displayed at a time on the lower line of the display. If the problem is with the pen channel input or printed circuit assembly for which real time values are currently on display, the appropriate error message for each failed test will be displayed. The display will continue to cycle through the messages until the test is passed. If the failure is for the pen channel not on display, then a message will alert the operator to the existence of one or more error messages for the other pen. The message is “Pn ERR”, where n is the number of the pen with errors not on display. Once the operator has toggled the display to the pen channel whose input or printed circuit assembly was the source of the error, the display will cycle through the appropriate error messages. Error messages are listed in Table 8-5, along with the type of test to which each applies, the reason for the failure, and how to correct the problem.

ATTENTION
In addition to error messages, the recorder will display special status messages when optional features are active. • If the lower display flashes “TUNING”, the recorder is in the process of automatically determining tuning parameters using the Accutune II feature described in Appendix F. • If the lower display flashes “RUN n” or “HOLD”, the recorder is executing setpoint program “n” as described in Appendix E, and the run or hold action was initiated locally. • If the lower display flashes “run n” or “hold”, the recorder is executing setpoint program “n”, and the run or hold action was initiated remotely.

If you are familiar with the operation of the recorder models without display, you are aware that in those models the red LED on the printed circuit assembly lights when the unit fails a self-diagnostic, or detects an out-of-range input. The red LED has a different function in the models with display and keypad. It is not an indication of a problem. In the models with display the red LED indicates that the display is currently interfacing with this PCA. Rely on the error messages to notify you of a problem with a recorder with a display. (The flashing green LED is an indication that the processor is active.)

8-6

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

1/99

Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display

Table 8-5 Error Messages Lower Display Indication CALERR Type of Test power-up background Reason For Failure The working calibration constants in the recorder are in error or corrupted in memory. How to Correct the Problem 1. Use the procedure in 4.5.2.5 to switch between the set of calibration constants being used (factory or field) to the other type. Exit configuration mode. Next go back into configuration mode and change back to whatever type of constants were being used in the first place (factory or field). This will overwrite the corrupted values in memory. 2. Change the setting of the “IN TYP” parameter and exit configuration mode. Go back into configuration mode and change the “IN TYP” setting back to the correct type. CFGERR power-up background Configuration data is in error. 1. Check all configuration parameter values for accuracy. (See Section 4 – Configuration, Startup, and Operation of Recorder with Display.) 2. Make a change to configuration, then exit configuration, so the recorder will recalculate the checksum error. 1. Try to change something in configuration. 2. Cycle the power. 3. If problem persists, replace printed circuit assembly for the channel. Table 8-5 continued on next page

EEFAIL

background

Unable to write to nonvolatile memory. Anytime you change a parameter and it is not accepted, you will see EE FAIL.

1/99

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

8-7

For this to occur. the recorder must have control enabled (control group parameter “CONTRL” = “ENAB”) when one or more of the following occur: • RAM test fails • Configuration test fails • Calibration test fails • Input parameter “BRNOUT” = “NONE” and the input fails. recorder cannot make analog to digital conversion. • Press the FUNC key to see what tests pass or fail. See input set up group in Section 4 – Configuration. loop through the status tests. Be sure the range and actuation are configured correctly. Recalibrate if step 3 does not clear the error. then run through the STATUS codes a second time to see if the error cleared. then return the input type to the original one.) How to Correct the Problem 1. Table 8-5 continued on next page INP FL background 8-8 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . 5.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 8-5 Error Messages. Enter it. 3.Product Manual 1/99 . Recorder detects an input failure. Replace the printed circuit assembly for the pen. 2. Check the input source. Startup. 2. and Operation of Recorder with Display and change the “IN TYP” or “LD CAL” to a different type. • Correct according to the recommendations given in this table. Run through STATUS check to determine the reason for the failure. 1. • Press the SET UP key until STATUS appears in the lower display. Continued Lower Display Indication FAILSF Type of Test power-up background Reason For Failure This error message is displayed whenever the recorder is using the value of the control group “FAILSF” parameter as an output. Refer to Section 5 – Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display. Two consecutive failures of input 1 integration (for example. 4. Check the operation of the input sensor.

if value of INP1 3. 1. If error does not clear. Make sure the range and actuation are configured properly. replace the printed circuit assembly for the pen. Field calibrate using the procedure in Section 5 – Input and Output Calibration for Recorders with Display. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . RAMTST power-up RAM failure 1. See Section 4 – Configuration. 4. Check the input source. 2. 3. as applicable. Continued Lower Display Indication INPRNG Type of Test background Reason For Failure Input out of range. Startup. 2. Follow the procedure in this table for is on display. Cycle power or press the reset switch SW2 to see if the error clears. Watch the display to see all error messages for the active channel. 2. for pen 2 fails. and Operation of Recorder with Display to restore the factory or field calibration. Replace the printed circuit assembly for the pen.Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display Table 8-5 Error Messages.Product Manual 8-9 . P1 ERR P2 ERR power-up background Indicates that one or more error messages are active for the pen channel for which values are not on display. 5. This alerts the operator to the need to switch the display to pen 2 to view the active error messages associated with that channel’s input and printed circuit assembly. Press the FUNC key to toggle to the other pen channel. How to Correct the Problem 1. while the input each message displayed. The process input is outside the range limits. P2 ERR will be displayed. For example.

5.5. Table 8-6 Observable Symptoms of Failure Symptom Recorder will not operate.10 8-10 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .5. Chart rotates at wrong speed or will not rotate (pen indication correct).Product Manual 1/99 . Modbus communications are not successful.8 8.5. Displayed output does not agree with controller output. External alarm function does not operate properly.5. Recorder operation is normal but pen trace is incorrect.5.5.6 8.9 8.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 8. Symptoms Compare your recorder’s symptoms with those shown in Table 8-6 and refer to the indicated subsection for the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.7 8. A key does not respond and/or a display does not light. See Subsection 8. there are observable symptoms of failure that can be identified by noting the erratic recorder functions.5.2 8.3 8.5 8.4 Observable Symptoms of Failure Introduction In addition to the error message prompts.4 8.5. Digital input function does not operate properly. Pen remains at high end of range when input signal is low.

MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE SERVICING. or a cross-reference to instructions elsewhere in the manual. Each procedure includes what to do if you have that particular failure.1 Overview Introduction The troubleshooting procedures for the observable symptoms of failure are presented in the same order as they appear in Table 8-6.Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display 8. • Voltmeter Safety precautions Exercise appropriate safety precautions when troubleshooting the recorder operation. AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. as well as instructions for accomplishing the task. etc. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD ! TROUBLESHOOTING MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS.Product Manual 8-11 . mV. Equipment needed You will need the following equipment in order to troubleshoot the symptoms listed in the tables that follow: • DC Milliammeter – mA DC • Calibration sources – T/c. Volt.5 Troubleshooting Procedures 8.5.

and conformance to installation instructions. Replace the PCA for pen 1. Check the system for brown-outs.2 Recorder Failure Troubleshooting Procedure Table 8-7 explains how to troubleshoot recorder failure symptoms.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 8. 4 Refer to the replacement procedures in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies. heavy load switching. 8-12 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Refer to AC wiring procedures in Section 2 – Installation.. 2 3 Check the connections to TB1 on the pen 1 PCA. Table 8-7 Troubleshooting Recorder Failure Symptoms Step 1 What to do Check the supply voltage. How to do it or where to find the instructions Measure the line voltage across the line and neutral connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assembly (PCA) on the right (for pen 1).5.Product Manual 1/99 . Refer to Section 2 – Installation. etc.

Measure input signal at TB2 or apply calibration source to verify input signal. 3 4 Check the pen alignment Check the sensor for the proper type and its ability to function. Follow the procedure in 8. How to do it or where to find the instructions Reposition or replace the ink cartridge as described in Section 6 – Routine Maintenance. replace the pen arm as described in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies. and Operation of Recorder with Display for instructions for viewing the configuration. Verify the input configuration data and operation of the sensor. 6 Replace the printed circuit assembly for the pen with the problem. 2 Check that the chart agrees with the actuation type and check chart and pen set up. If the pen arm is severely warped. Refer to Section 4 – Configuration. assuming that the pen channel is configured to trace the input value. 5 Replace the servo plate assembly. Table 8-8 Troubleshooting Pen Trace Failure Symptoms Step 1 What to do Check the ink cartridge for proper installation.3 Pen Trace Troubleshooting Procedure Table 8-8 explains how to troubleshoot a problem with the pen trace not matching the (correct) displayed value.5. Startup.6. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 8-13 . See Section 6 – Routine Maintenance for instructions for replacing the chart. Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies.Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display 8. Replace wrong chart with correct chart. Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies.

and Operation of Recorder with Display. Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies. if required. How to do it or where to find the instructions Turn the chart until the desired time line on the chart is aligned with the time index on the chart plate and pen 1 before closing the locking clip on the hub.5.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 8. (subsection 4. Table 8-9 Troubleshooting Chart Rotation Failure Symptoms Step 1 What to do Check the chart installation.4 Chart Rotation Troubleshooting Procedure Table 8-9 explains how to troubleshoot a chart rotation problem. Refer to Section 4 – Configuration. Startup.Product Manual 1/99 .3) Power down the recorder.4. 5 6 Replace the printed circuit board for pen 1. Replace the chart motor. 4 Check the motor cable plug connection at connector P3 on the printed circuit assembly for pen 1. and Operation of Recorder with Display. Startup. Push down on the lifter to return the pen(s) to the chart. then visually examine the plug and re-seat it. Run the step test. Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies. 8-14 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . CAUTION: Do not try to rotate the hub 2 3 Check the configured chart speed value and change it. Refer to Section 4 – Configuration.

5. Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies. 4 Replace the servo plate assembly.Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display 8.3) Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies. 5 Replace the printed circuit assembly for the pen having the problem. 2 3 Check the pen and input configuration Refer to Section 4 – Configuration. How to do it or where to find the instructions Replace the sensor lead wires as needed. Check the connections to TB2 on the printed circuit assembly for the pen with the problem.4. (subsection 4. and Operation of Recorder with Display. Tighten the connections. Table 8-10 Troubleshooting Erratic Pen Movement Symptoms Step 1 What to do Check the sensor and lead wires for continuity.Product Manual 8-15 . and Operation of Recorder with Display. Startup. Startup. Run step test. data. Refer to Section 4 – Configuration.5 Troubleshooting Erratic Pen Movement Procedure Table 8-10 explains what to do if the pen remains at the high end of range when the input signal is low. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

How to do it or where to find the instructions Refer to Section 4 – Configuration. and Operation of Recorder with Display for procedure for running key test.6 Troubleshooting the Keypad and Display Procedure Table 8-11 explains what to do if a key does not respond and/or the display does not light. Replace the display and keypad assembly or display cables.4) Insure tracks on cable are aligned with pins on connector. as required. 2 Verify correct alignment of display cable with pins on connector at display module and main PCA.Product Manual 1/99 . 3 8-16 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .4.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 8. Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies.4.5. Table 8-11 Troubleshooting Keypad and/or Display Failure Symptoms Step 1 What to do Run a Key Test to check the operation of the keys and displays. (subsection 4. Startup.

If it does. Refer to Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies. Be sure all the recorder and control related data is correct. Refer to Section 2 – Installation. 4 5 6 Check the field wiring. Replace the relay. Check that the applicable output relay actuates properly. and Operation of Recorder with Display. Replace the printed circuit assembly for the pen channel having the problem. and Operation of Recorder with Display. Table 8-12 Troubleshooting Relay Output Failure Symptoms Step 1 2 3 What to do Be sure the recorder is configured for relay output. Startup. Refer to Section 4 – Configuration. Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies.5. Put the recorder into manual mode and adjust the output manually to raise or lower the PV around the setpoint. How to do it or where to find the instructions Refer to Section 4 – Configuration. Startup. Observe OUT 1 or OUT 2 value on the front display. Listen for the click of the relay as the PV moves in either direction.7 Troubleshooting Relay Output Procedure Table 8-12 explains what to do if the displayed output does not agree with the single relay or dual relay control output.Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display 8.Product Manual 8-17 . go to step 4. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

Refer to Section 2 – Installation. 8-18 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Table 8-13 Troubleshooting External Alarm Function Failure Symptoms Step 1 2 3 What to do Be sure all the alarm configuration data is correct. Check the field wiring.8 Troubleshooting External Alarm Function Procedure Table 8-13 explains what to do if the external alarm function does not operate properly. [n = 1 or 2].5. and Operation of Recorder with Display. Check that the applicable alarm relay Alarms can be triggered either by: actuates properly depending on ALARM TYPE configuration selection. or • connecting a signal generator to the input and setting the generator level beyond the trip-point values. How to do it or where to find the instructions Refer to Section 4 – Configuration. • reconfiguring the value of the trip points (AnSnVA).Product Manual 1/99 . Startup.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 8.

or MNFS on REMSW1 or REMSW2. Refer to Section 2 – Installation.9 Troubleshooting Remote Switch (Digital Input) Function Procedure Table 8-14 explains what to do if the digital input function does not operate properly. and Operation of Recorder with Display. Remote switch actuates either by: • reconfiguring PENIN for REM1 or REM2.5.Product Manual 8-19 . MAN. How to do it or where to find the instructions Refer to Section 4 – Configuration. or • reconfiguring REM SW for SP2. Table 8-14 Troubleshooting Remote Switch (Digital Input) Function Failure Symptoms Step 1 What to do Be sure all remote switch configuration data is correct. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . 2 3 Check the field wiring. Check that the applicable remote switch actuates properly depending on REMOTE SWITCH configuration selection. See section for pen parameters set up group or remote switch set up group. Startup.Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display 8.

Startup. and Operation of Recorder with Display. Check that the configured baud rate is Refer to Section 4 . Refer to Section 4 . A recorder with two pens must have a unique address for each pen channel.Configuration. correct. If communication is used for Pen 2. PCA to J3 on the PCA for Pen 1. How to do it or where to find the instructions Refer to Section 4 .10 Troubleshooting Modbus Communications Procedure Table 8-15 explains what to do if Modbus communications are not successful. and Operation of Recorder with Display.5. Check that the device address is correct.Installation. Startup.Replacing Hardware connects J2 on the communication Assemblies. 6 Replace the communication PCA. 4 Refer to Section 2 . another communication cable must connect J1 on the communication PCA with J3 on the PCA for Pen 2. Refer to the replacement pocedure in Section 9 .Configuration.Configuration. 8-20 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Each address must be unique.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 8. 5 Verify that the communcation cable Refer to Section 9 .Product Manual 1/99 .Replacing Hardware Assemblies. and Operation of Recorder with Display. Table 8-15 Troubleshooting Modbus Communications Step 1 2 3 What to do Verify that communications are enabled. Startup. The PCA for Pen 1 is on the right when facing the recorder. Check that the communication wires are properly connected to the J3 connector on the communication printed circuir assembly (PCA).

Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display 8. this probably will not be necessary. Table 8-16 Procedure for Aligning Pen at Zero and Span Step 1 Press SET UP Action/Result until you can see: Upper Display ALIN Lower Display PEN 2 until you can see: FUNC Upper Display (value) (approximately 60 on the upper display) Lower Display PEN0 Wait until pen stops moving downscale. 3 4 Turn off the power to the recorder. Turn on the power and repeat Step 2. Procedure Follow the procedure in Table 8-16 to align the pens. If the pen tip is greatly out of position.) If pen position requires only minor adjustment.6 Alignment of Pen at Zero and Span Introduction If the pen trace does not track at the correct chart increment with a known input value. press FUNC key to toggle input for display. If it is not on display. If the recorder has 2 pens. you can use the following procedure to adjust the pen travel at zero and span (full scale) to compensate for the effects of humidity on the chart size. Table 8-16 continued on next page 5 6 7 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . loosen the screw holding the pen 1 (purple) arm to the servo shaft and move the pen arm to access the locking screw for the pen 2 (red) arm (if applicable). Align the tip of pen 2 with the zero line on the chart and tighten the locking screw. To place the pen tips in approximately the correct position. (Unless a pen arm has been replaced. follow Steps 3 through 7. Align the tip of pen 1 with the zero line on the chart and tighten the locking screw. be sure Input1 (INP 1) is on the display.Product Manual 8-21 . go to Step 8.

25% (or quarter graduation). you will see: Upper Display (value) Lower Display INP and the Input 1 indicator will be lit.25% (or quarter graduation). 2. If the recorder has 2 pens go to Step 12. Continued Step 8 or Press Action/Result To set tip of pen 1 (purple) on zero scale line of chart + 0.Product Manual 1/99 . 8-22 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . and 8 through 11 for pen 2 (red). Repeat Steps 1. 10 or To set tip of pen 1 (purple) on full scale line of chart + 0.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table 8-16 Pen Alignment at Span and Zero. 12 FUNC you will see: Upper Display (value) Lower Display INP and the Input 2 indicator will be lit. 9 FUNC and you will see: Upper Display (value) (approximately 1200 more than the zero value in Step 2) Lower Display PEN 100 Wait until pen stops moving upscale. 11 DISP to return to normal operation for pen 1.

a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC power connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assemblies for the pens (behind the chart plate). you will need the following equipment: • Phillips-head screwdriver.9 Replacing the Totalizer Battery 9.Replacing Hardware Assemblies 9. What’s in this section? Table 9-1 lists the topics covered in this section.8 Replacing the Digital Input Printed Circuit Assembly 9. Troubleshooting procedures are in Section 7 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder Without Display and Section 8 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder With Display. ! Equipment needed To accomplish the procedures that follow.7 Replacing the Display and Keypad Assembly 9. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .6 Replacing the Printed Circuit Assembly 9. Part numbers and illustrations showing the location of assemblies are in Section 10 – Parts List. and • small pliers.Product Manual 9-1 .1 Overview 9.5 Replacing the Chart Motor and Chart Hub 9. In CE and UL models hazardous voltages are also present at the power connections inside the bottom of the case.2 Replacing Pen Arm 1 9. Table 9-1 Topics in Section 9 Topic 9.4 Replacing the Servo Assembly 9. • flat-bladed screwdriver. See Page 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-8 9-9 9-10 9-11 WARNING When the unit is powered.1 Overview Introduction This section provides instructions for replacing hardware assemblies in the DR4300 recorder.3 Replacing Pen Arm 2 9.10 Replacing the Communication Printed Circuit Assembly Safety precautions Exercise appropriate safety precautions when replacing recorder hardware. Replacing Hardware Assemblies 9.

but leave the screw slightly loose. Push down the pen lifter and carefully position the pen to the location noted in Step 1. Remove the screw.Product Manual 1/99 . Procedure Follow the procedure in Table 9-2 to replace pen arm 1. MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE SERVICING. flat washer. Refer to Section 7 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder Without Display or Section 8 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder With Display.2 Replacing Pen Arm 1 Introduction The procedure described here assumes that the power is removed. Remove the ink cartridge. AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. lockwasher. lockwasher. and flat washer that hold the pen arm to the servo shaft. Align the pen. 9-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD ! TROUBLESHOOTING MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS. a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC power connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assemblies for the pens (behind the chart plate).DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 9. Table 9-2 Procedure for Replacing Pen Arm 1 Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action Note the location of the pen (purple) on the chart. Replace the pen arm. Replace the ink cartridge. ! WARNING When the unit is powered. Remove the pen arm. In CE and UL models hazardous voltages are also present at the power connections inside the bottom of the case. Tighten the pen arm screw. Pull the lifter up to raise the pen from the chart. and screw.

Align the pens.3 Replacing Pen Arm 2 Introduction The procedure described here assumes that the power is removed. Remove the screw. Remove the ink cartridges. and screw. Push down the pen lifter and carefully position pen 2 to the location noted in Step 1. In CE and UL models hazardous voltages are also present at the power connections inside the bottom of the case. WARNING When the unit is powered. Tighten the pen 1 arm screw. . Push down the pen lifter and carefully position the pen 1 to the location noted in Step 1. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Remove the pen arm. Replace the red ink cartridge on the pen 2 arm. Replace the pen 1 arm. and screw. a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC power connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assemblies for the pens (behind the chart plate).Replacing Hardware Assemblies 9. Raise the pen lifter and replace the purple ink cartridge on the pen 1 arm. Refer to Section 7 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder Without Display or Section 8 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder With Display. Remove the screw.Product Manual 9-3 . and flat washer that hold the pen 2 arm to the servo shaft. Remove the pen arm. flat washer. Tighten the pen 2 arm screw. Pull the lifter up to raise the pens from the chart. lockwasher. lockwasher. but leave the screw slightly loose. lockwasher. Replace the pen 2 arm. and flat washer that hold the pen 1 arm to the servo shaft. flat washer. lockwasher. Table 9-3 Procedure for Replacing Pen Arm 2 Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Action Note the location of pens on the chart. but leave the screw slightly loose. ! Procedure Follow the procedure in Table 9-3 to replace pen arm 2.

! WARNING When the unit is powered. Procedure Follow the procedure in Table 9-4 to replace the servo assembly.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 9. Refer to Section 7 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder Without Display or Section 8 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder With Display. 3 4 5 6 9-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .4 Replacing the Servo Assembly Introduction The procedure described here assumes that the chart door is opened. disconnect the pen cable for pen 2 from the P1 connector on the PCA on the left. In CE and UL models hazardous voltages are also present at the power connections inside the bottom of the case. and the power is removed. ATTENTION Complement this procedure with the appropriate pen arm replacement procedure(s).3. (Refer to 9. Align the pen(s). Remove the servo assembly. Replace the pen arm(s). Dress the cable(s) in the clamps and connect the cable plugs to the appropriate connectors on the PCA for each pen. Remove the screws that hold the servo assembly to the chart plate. Table 9-4 Procedure for Replacing the Servo Assembly Step 1 2 Action Remove the pen arm(s).) Disconnect the pen cable for pen 1 from the P2 connector on the printed circuit assembly (PCA) on the right. the chart plate is swung out. In a 2-pen unit.Product Manual 1/99 .2 and 9. a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC power connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assemblies for the pens (behind the chart plate). Remove the cable(s) from the clamps in the rear of the case. Replace the servo assembly and secure with the screws.

Turn the chart until the desired time line on the chart is aligned with the time index on the chart plate and pen 1 before closing the locking clip on the hub. Push down on the lifter to return the pen(s) to the chart. Set the chart time to the time index on the chart plate and push down the pen lifter. WARNING When the unit is powered. 3 4 5 6 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Dress the cable in the clamps and connect plug to P3 on the PCA for pen 1. a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC power connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assemblies for the pens (behind the chart plate). CAUTION: Do not try to rotate the hub 7 Close the chart plate and replace the chart. Press-fit the new chart hub assembly onto the motor shaft until the hub is flush with the chart plate. In CE and UL models hazardous voltages are also present at the power connections inside the bottom of the case.5 Replacing the Chart Motor and Chart Hub Introduction The procedure described here assumes that the chart door is opened. Table 9-5 Procedure for Replacing the Chart Motor and Chart Hub Step 1 2 Action Pull up the pen lifter to raise the pen(s) from the chart. and the power is removed. Remove the screws holding the motor to the chart plate and remove the chart motor. Using an allen wrench loosen the set screw on the chart hub and remove the chart hub from the from the motor shaft. Replace the motor and secure it with screws. Disconnect the chart motor cable plug from the P3 connector on the printed circuit assembly (PCA) for pen 1 (board on the right) and remove the cable from the clamps in the rear of the case. the chart plate is swung out.Replacing Hardware Assemblies 9.Product Manual 9-5 . ! Procedure To replace the chart motor and chart hub follow the procedure in Table 9-5.

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder

9.6 Replacing the Printed Circuit Assembly
Introduction The procedure described here assumes that the chart door is opened, the chart plate is swung out, and the power is removed.

!

WARNING
When the unit is powered, a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC power connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assemblies for the pens (behind the chart plate). In CE and UL models hazardous voltages are also present at the power connections inside the bottom of the case.

Procedure Follow the procedure in Table 9-6 to replace the printed circuit assembly. Connection locations are shown in Figure 9-1.

Table 9-6 Procedure for Replacing the Printed Circuit Assembly Step 1 Action Tag and disconnect all the cable plugs and removable terminal blocks from the connectors on the printed circuit assembly (PCA). Note the position of all dip switches for configuration and input. If the Digital I/O board is installed, disconnect and remove the board. (Refer to Table 9-8.) Disconnect transmitter power wiring from TB1. 2 3 4 Remove the screws from the corners of the PCA and lift it from the case. Remove K1 and K2 relays and install either the Solid State Relays or Open Collector Output if they were on the old PCA. Set switches on new PCA to match the PCA being removed.

If the PCA you are installing is for the FM-approved Limit Controller, be sure the part is 51404453-005.
5 6 7 Position the new PCA in the case and secure with the screws. Replace the cable plugs and terminal blocks disconnected in Step 1, re-install the Digital I/O board (if applicable), and reconnect transmitter power wiring. If the recorder has a display, configure the new PCA using the procedure in Section 4 – Configuration, Startup and Operation of Recorder with Display.

9-6

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

1/99

Replacing Hardware Assemblies

Pen #2 Connector Pen #1 Connector Chart Motor P1 P2 P3

Digital Input Processor Interface Cable Connector Battery Connector J3 J4 J1 Keyboard/Display Connector Communications Board Connector

SW1
12 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

Configuration Switches S2 = Reset S3 = Lower S4 = Raise

SW4

SW2 LOWER

SW3

J10
RAISE

Input Switches
N L
SETUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 SW5

TB2 Input Connector

AC Power TB1 Run/Setup Switch

RUN

ON

SW6

J13

Digital Input Connector

Relays

K1

K2

Optional Digital Input

Instrument Signal Ground

TB4
3 2 1

TB3
3 2 1

TB5 Lockwasher
1

Terminal Ground
24238

Current Output

Relay Outputs

Ferrite Bead Assembly Case Ground

Figure 9-1 Connector Locations

1/99

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

9-7

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder

9.7 Replacing the Display and Keypad Assembly
Introduction The procedure described here assumes that the chart door is opened, the chart plate is swung out, and the power is removed.

!

WARNING
When the unit is powered, a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC power connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assemblies for the pens (behind the chart plate). In CE and UL models hazardous voltages are also present at the power connections inside the bottom of the case.

Procedure Follow the procedure in Table 9-7 to replace the optional display and keypad.

Table 9-7 Procedure for Replacing the Display and Keypad Assembly Step 1 2 Action Note cable orientation before removing the two screws holding the display and keypad assembly to the top of the case. Disconnect cable(s) from back side of display printed circuit assembly (PCA) by pulling outward on the end tabs of the cable connector(s). (Unless you are also replacing the cable, you can leave it attached to J4 on the main PCA.) Install cable(s) on new display PCA by inserting cable in connector and pushing in on end of connector tabs to lock cable in place. Insure proper cable alignment at connector. Secure the new display and keypad assembly to the case with the screws removed in Step 1. Close the chart plate and apply power. Check for normal display indication.

3

4 5

9-8

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

1/99

Replacing Hardware Assemblies

9.8 Replacing the Digital Input Printed Circuit Assembly
Introduction The procedure described here assumes that the chart door is opened, the chart plate is swung out, and the power is removed.

WARNING
When the unit is powered, a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC power connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assemblies for the pens (behind the chart plate). In CE and UL models hazardous voltages are also present at the power connections inside the bottom of the case.

!

Procedure Follow the procedure in Table 9-8 to replace the optional digital input printed circuit assembly.

Table 9-8 Procedure for Replacing the Digital Input Printed Circuit Assembly Step 1 2 3 4 Action Locate the digital input printed circuit assembly (PCA) mounted on top of the pen channel’s printed circuit assembly on three plastic stand-offs. Disconnect the field wiring from P3D on the old digital input PCA. Disconnect the power cable from J9 on the old digital input PCA. (You can leave it attached to J13 on the main PCA unless you are also replacing the cable.) Disconnect the processor interface cable from P7 on the old digital input PCA. (You can leave it attached to J10 on the main PCA unless you are also replacing the cable.) Loosen the digital input ground wire (WG) from the ground terminal located on the main PCA. To remove the old digital input PCA, use needle-nose pliers to squeeze together the split top of the stand-off on the left and slide the PCA off the stand-off. Repeat for the center and right stand-offs. Position the new digital PCA on the stand-offs and press it in place. Replace the cable plugs, terminal block, and ground wire disconnected in Steps 2 through 5.

5 6

7 8

1/99

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

9-9

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder

9.9 Replacing the Totalizer Battery
Introduction The procedure described here assumes that the chart door is opened, the chart plate is swung out, and the power is removed.

!

WARNING
When the unit is powered, a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC power connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assemblies for the pens (behind the chart plate). In CE and UL models hazardous voltages are also present at the power connections inside the bottom of the case.

!

WARNING
The lithium totalizer battery may explode or leak if inserted improperly, recharged, or disposed of in fire.

Procedure Follow the procedure in Table 9-9 to replace the battery for the optional totalizer. Replacement battery is customer-supplied; use Rayovac #841-B, 4.5V computer clock battery.

Table 9-9 Procedure for Replacing the Totalizer Battery Step 1 Action Each pen channel can have an optional totalizer with a battery to retain the value when the unit is powered down. To remove the old battery, pull it from its Velcro mounting on the inside of the case. Disconnect the cable attached to the old battery from J1 on the printed circuit assembly for the pen channel. Connect the keyed connector on the cable attached to the new battery from J1 on the printed circuit assembly for the pen channel. Push the Velcro strip on the new battery onto the mating Velcro inside the cabinet. The value of the totalizer may not be accurate after the battery is replaced. You may want to reset the totalizer to zero after the unit is powered up (see 4.5.2.6).

2 3 4 5

9-10

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder - Product Manual

1/99

See Figure 10-3. DO NOT DETACH THE CABLES FROM THE BACK OF THE DISPLAY AND KEYPAD ASSEMBLY. Connect the communication cable(s) to the new communication PCA. Secure the new communication PCA to the case with the screws removed in Step 5.) Disconnect the communcation PCA ground wire that is attached to the chart plate screw.Product Manual 9-11 . a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC power connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assemblies for the pens (behind the chart plate). disconnect the end of the communication cable(s) at the communication PCA.10 Replacing the Communication Printed Circuit Assembly Introduction The procedure described here assumes that the chart door is opened. (See Figure 2-11. and the power is removed. ! Procedure Follow the procedure in Table 9-10 to replace the optional communication printed circuit assembly Table 9-10 Procedure for Replacing the Communication Printed Circuit Assembly Step 1 Action Detach the display and keypad assembly by removing the two screws holding it to the case. Attach the communication ground wire to the chart plate screw. WARNING When the unit is powered. Re-attach the display and keypad assembly using the screws removed in Step 1. Move the display and keypad assembly so you can access the communication printed circuit assembly (PCA) at the top left of the case. Dress the cables in the wire clamps inside the case.Replacing Hardware Assemblies 9. Leaving the communication cable connected to J3 on the printed circuit assembly for Pen 1 (and Pen 2 if present). Detach the communication PCA by removing the two screws holding it to the case. The cable for Pen 1 connects to J2 on the communication PCA. the chart plate is swung out. The cable for Pen 2 connects to J1 on the communication PCA. In CE and UL models hazardous voltages are also present at the power connections inside the bottom of the case. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

Product Manual 1/99 .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 9-12 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

What’s in this section? Table 10-1 lists the topics in this section. Table 10-1 Topics in Section 10 Topic 10.Parts List 10.2 Internal Cabling Figure 10-4 Figure 10-5 Door Assembly Chart Plate Recorder Components Internal Cabling CE Mark Version Internal Cabling Non-CE Mark Version See Page 10-1 10-2 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-6 10-7 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .2 Exploded Views Figure 10-1 Figure 10-2 Figure 10-3 10. When ordering parts. be sure to specify your recorder’s serial and model numbers (on chartplate) as well as the part number. Each part is labeled with a key number and the key numbers are listed in tables with associated part numbers. that is.Product Manual 10-1 . The figures that follow are exploded views of the DR4300 recorder.1 Overview 10.1 Overview Introduction This section provides the replacement parts lists for the DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder. Most parts are supplied on an optimum replacement unit basis. Parts List 10. Also included for your reference are an Internal Cabling drawing (Figure 10-4) and an Internal Wiring Diagram (Figure 10-5) for options only. part numbers are given for complete printed circuit assemblies rather than for individual PCA components.

The described part cannot be ordered separately. Table 10-2 is a list of the associated part numbers.2 Exploded Views Door assembly Figure 10-1 is an exploded view of the door assembly.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 10.Product Manual 1/99 . (K) denotes that the part number is for the parts kit in which the described part is included. 1-1 1-2 1 1-3 1-2 1-1 24187 Figure 10-1 Door Assembly Table 10-2 Door Assembly Parts Key Part Number Description Recommended Spare Parts Per 10 1 51309609-501 51309609-502 1-1 1-2 1-3 (K)30756409-002 (K)30756409-002 51309609-503 30757307-503 51198139-501 51309609-504 Door Assembly (includes components for all door variations) Gray Door Blue Door Hinge Pin* Retaining Ring* Latch/Lock Assembly Kit* Key Only for Lock Assembly* Graphic Overlay for Door* (not shown) External Keypad Assembly Replacement Kit* (not shown) 1 1 1 3 100 1 Quantity per Unit 2 2 1 *Parts included with applicable door assembly. 10-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

1 Purple Pen Cartridge (six pack) No.Product Manual 10-3 . 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . 2 Pen Arm (2-pen model only) No. 2 Red Pen Cartridge (six pack) Chart Motor Servo Plate Assembly 1-pen model 2-pen model Chart Hub Kit Pen Lifter Retainer Description Recommended Spare Parts Per 10 1 1 1 1 1 100 5 5 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 Quantity per Unit 1 1 (K) denotes that the part number is for the parts kit in which the described part is included.Parts List Chart plate Figure 10-2 is an exploded view of the chart plate assembly. Table 10-3 is a list of the associated part numbers. 3 7 8 4 5 2 1 24215 6 Figure 10-2 Chart Plate Assembly Table 10-3 Chart Plate Assembly Parts Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 30755833-501 30755833-502 7 8 (K)30756150-501 (K)30756409-002 Part Number (K)30756409-002 (K)30756409-002 30735489-007 30735489-002 30756113-501 No. The described part cannot be ordered separately. 1 Pen Arm No.

Table 10-4 is a list of the associated part numbers.Product Manual 1/99 .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Basic recorder components without options Figure 10-3 is an exploded view of the recorder. 5 1 2 3 4 24090A Figure 10-3 Recorder Components 10-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

CE version 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 1 1/2 1/2 up to 3 1 1/2 1 1 3 1/2 Recommended Spare Parts Per 10 100 Quantity per Unit Parts Not Shown 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Record and Control Spare Kit (includes solid state relay and open collector output) Printed Circuit Assembly. FM-approved Limit Controller (includes solid state relay and open collector output) Case Cable Replacement Kit Digital Input Assembly Modbus Communication Assembly Round cable suppression cores. package of 2 Round cable suppression cores. FM-approved Limit Controller (includes solid state relay and open collector output) 20-27 Vac/Vdc models 51404453-511 51404453-512 51404453-515 2 3 4 5 30755800-502 51404511-501 51404566-501 51404750-502 51197612-502 51197612-508 51404459-501 51198150-501 30755306-501 30756725-501 30756679-501 51204403-501 51404753-501 Upgrade PROMs 51197993-501 51198182-501 51198183-501 51404862-501 Basic Recorder PROM.Solid State Relay Kit . latest software version Totalizer Upgrade PROM PID Control Upgrade PROM Auxilary Output/Timer Upgrade PROM Printed Circuit Assembly. Record Only Printed Circuit Assembly.Electromechanical Relay Kit .Open Collector Transmitter 24V Power Supply Assembly filter assembly. Record and Control Spare Kit (includes solid state relay and open collector output) Printed Circuit Assembly. 2 inch size Relay Kit .Product Manual 10-5 . Record Only Printed Circuit Assembly.Parts List Table 10-4 Basic Recorder Parts Key 1 51404453-501 51404453-502 51404453-505 Part Number Description 100 to 240 Vac models Printed Circuit Assembly. package of 8 Display Module Printed Circuit Assembly Pipe Mounting Kit.

30755062-008 4 conductor pen motor cable Chassis Ground for RS485/422 Communication Card51404880-001 Pen 2 Motor Chart Motor PenPen 1 Motor 1 Motor 4 conductor pen motor cable 4 conductor chart motor cable 24V Power Supply Cable.30755062-006 AC Supply Voltage CE Mark Filter Assembly51404753-001 Figure 10-4 DR4300 Recorder (CE Mark) – Internal Cabling Diagram 10-6 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 1/99 .51404585-001 P7 J9 Digital Input Digital Input Ground Cable P7 J9 Digital Input Digital Input Ground Cable Power cable51309731-001 Ground cable.51404585-001 Digital Input Power Cable.30755062-006 Ground Lug Ground cable.51309650-002 Pen 1 Pen 2 12 conductor flat flexible cable51309650-001 Ground cable.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Chart Plate Display / Keyboard 12 conductor flat flexible cable.51404588-001 5 conductor cable51404677-001 J1 Battery J4 RS485/422 Communication Card J2 24V AC Transmitter In Power Supply Battery P1 P2 P3 J1 J10 J3 J4 P1 P2 P3 J10 J1 J3 J4 Digital Input Cable51404586-001 Digital Input Cable51404586-001 TB1 TB1 Pen 2 Mainboard Shield Wire Pen 1 Mainboard J13 J13 Digital Input Power Cable.

the 51404588-002 cable assembly is used. Figure 10-5 DR4300 Recorder (Non-CE Mark) – Internal Cabling Diagram 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . the 51309731-002 cable assembly is used.51404588-001 5 conductor cable51404677-001 J1 Battery J4 RS485/422 Communication Card J2 24V AC Transmitter In Power Supply Battery P1 P2 P3 J1 J10 J3 J4 P1 P2 P3 J10 J1 J3 J4 Digital Input Cable51404586-001 Digital Input Cable51404586-001 TB1 2 Pen power cable assembly 51309731-002 TB1 Pen 2 Mainboard J13 Digital Input Power Cable. For 2 pen units.30755062-006 AC Supply Voltage connector NOTE: For 1 pen units.51404585-001 P7 J9 Digital Input Digital Input Ground Cable P7 J9 Digital Input Digital Input Ground Cable Ground cable.51309650-002 Pen 1 Pen 2 12 conductor flat flexible cable51309650-001 Ground cable.30755062-009 4 conductor pen motor cable Chassis Ground for RS485/422 Communication Card51404880-001 Pen 2 Motor Chart Motor PenPen 1 Motor 1 Motor 4 conductor pen motor cable 4 conductor chart motor cable 24V Power Supply Cable.51404585-001 Shield Wire Pen 1 Mainboard J13 Digital Input Power Cable.Parts List Chart Plate Display / Keyboard 12 conductor flat flexible cable.30755062-006 TB6 Ground Lug Ground cable.Product Manual 10-7 .

Product Manual 1/99 .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 10-8 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

Appendix A .Product Manual A-1 . There are.5 Power Source Considerations A.How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments A. certain guidelines regarding installation and wiring which must be carefully followed in order to achieve this performance. the noise can be transferred into the system’s logic networks and can be misinterpreted as signal data. Otherwise. other measures must be taken to minimize the effects of electromagnetic interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference (RFI) on the operation of the equipment. In addition to the traditional precaution of the separation of signal and power wiring in separate conduits. if high level.1 Overview A. How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments A.6 Noise Suppression at the Source See Page A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-6 A-7 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . noise spikes are permitted to enter the digital equipment. What’s in this section? This section contains the following information: Topic A. resulting in erroneous system operation and other unpredictable responses.4 Recommended Wiring Practices A.2 Potential Noise Sources A. however. These advantages can result in better product uniformity and greater overall efficiency when used correctly. short duration.1 Overview Guideline overview Products that incorporate digital technology provide recognized performance advantages over conventional analog instrumentation used for process control.3 Prevention Methods A.

Most power lines. namely: • Capacitive (or electrostatic) • Inductive (or magnetic) • Impedance Capacitive and inductive coupling Capacitive and inductive coupling have the same essential effect: they couple current or voltage. These include: • Large relays • Contactors • Motor starters • Business and industrial machines • Power tools • High Intensity Discharge (HID) lights • Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCRs) that are phase-angled fired These devices generate noise by lowering the line voltage during energization when large currents are drawn for short periods of time. but are nearly always associated with switching circuits of some nature.2 Potential Noise Sources Overview Noise can enter electronic equipment via three methods of coupling. Typical noise-generating sources that could affect electronic equipment through capacitive and inductive coupling include: • Relay coils • Solenoids • AC power wires — particularly at or above 100 Vac • Current carrying cables • Thyristor field exciters • Radio frequency transmissions Impedance coupled noise Impedance coupled noise may enter by way of the lines used to power the digital equipment or by way of improper grounding. A-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . The noise on them can be generated in many ways.Product Manual 1/99 .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder A. at typical industrial locations. Impedance coupling requires a connection between the two circuits. without any actual connection of the two circuits. are far from noise-free.

3 Prevention Methods Introduction There are three ways to prevent electrical noise from interfering with the operation of the electronic digital equipment: • Built-in noise rejection • Separation of signal and power lines • Noise suppression at source Built-in noise rejection The first method is to design the digital equipment with a high degree of noise rejection built-in. It is the responsibility of the installer to follow good wiring practices. is the responsibility of the manufacturer who usually performs extensive laboratory and field testing of newly designed digital equipment to insure the adequacy of its immunity to noise. liberal use of noise rejection filters and opto-isolators. Signal and power line separation The second method is to prevent noise from getting on the signal and power lines that are connected to the equipment. This.Appendix A . and the use of noise suppressers on potential noise sources within the equipment itself.How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments A. This is the most effective but also the most difficult because it is not easy to identify all of the potential noise sources in a typical industrial installation. In some cases. This includes housing the equipment in a case that will provide shielding.6. separate power lines or special power line regulation or filtering may be required for satisfactory electronic digital equipment operation. This is achieved by proper separation and shielding of those lines. the equipment should be able to pass the tests outlined in the IEEE Standard 472-1974 (Surge Withstand Capacity Tests). As a minimum requirement. (See subsection B.Product Manual A-3 .) 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Therefore. ’’suppression’’ is usually a last resort for those extreme situations where the other methods are insufficient by themselves. of course. Suppression at the source The third prevention method is to suppress the noise at its source.

but bundles with different types of signals must be kept separated to prevent inductive or capacitive coupling.Product Manual 1/99 . Wires carrying similar types of signals (Table A-1) may be bundled together.) 4-20 mA output signal wiring Digital input wiring Communication wiring Transmitter power out wiring Low voltage alarm relay output wiring Low voltage wiring to solid state type control circuits 3 • • A-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Table A-1 External Wiring Category 1 • • • • 2 Line power wiring Earth ground wiring Control relay output wiring Line voltage alarm wiring Wire Functions Analog signal wire.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder A.4 Recommended Wiring Practices General rules All wiring must conform to local codes and practices. 4 to 20 mA. such as: • • • • • Input signal wire (thermocouple. Wire bundling Table A-1 shows what wiring may be bundled together. etc.

How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments Additional rules Please observe these additional rules for wire bundling: • For distances over five (5) feet. and when shielding is recommended. a grounded steel barrier or grid should be placed between the unlike levels at the crossover points. Where conduits or trays are not practical. • Wires containing low level signals should not be routed near any of the following: • Contactors • Motors • Generators • Radio transmitters • Wires carrying high current that is being switched on and off • Use a 12-gage (or heavier) insulated stranded wire for the ground connection. use a separate metal tray or conduit for each bundle. which impair shielding. they should cross at a 90-degree angle and at a maximum spacing. preferably the instrument end. • All shields should be grounded at one end only. Where it is not possible to provide spacing. • Tray covers must be in continuous contact with the side rails of the trays. Tray covers must be used for complete shielding.Appendix A . Attach it firmly to a proven good earth ground such as a metal stake driven into the ground. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . • When unlike signal levels must cross. use twisted wires with a metal overbraid and provide physical separation of at least one foot. either in trays or conduits. • Trays containing low level wiring should have solid bottoms and sides.Product Manual A-5 . Tray cover contact with side rails must be positive and continuous to avoid high reluctance air gaps. Trays for low level cables should be metal and solidly grounded.

For those installations where the supply voltage will not stay within the specified limits. if necessary. shielded primary and secondary windings may be required. a ferroresonant transformer. convenience outlets. Transformer for digital equipment Figure A-1 is an illustration of a separate transformer required to supply power to digital equipment.5 Power Source Considerations Operate within limits The AC power for the digital electronic equipment must be within the voltage and frequency limits specified for that equipment. And.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder A.Product Manual 1/99 . the AC source for the digital electronic equipment should be independent of all other loads especially when switching loads are involved. Attempts to operate outside the specified limits will result in no performance. motors. or similar noise-generating devices. it should not provide power for airconditioning. For additional noise and transient rejection. for voltage resolution. power line filters may be added to attenuate noise signals that have a higher frequency than the power line frequency. To obtain electrical isolation (see Figure A-1) a separate transformer is required to supply power to the digital equipment. Independent AC source For protection against noise. should be used. H Power source 120/240 Vac single phase H To digital electronic equipment N N G 21460 Figure A-1 Transformer for Digital Equipment A-6 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . For example. lighting.

For this reason. An MOV is connected in parallel with the coil and is as close as physically possible to the coil (see Figure A-2). supply Relay coil or solenoid 0. the magnitude of the electrical noise is so great that it must be suppressed at the source.5 mfd 100V 220 ohms 21461 Figure A-2 Transient Suppression in Inductive Coils 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . MOV devices (listed in Table A-2) are recommended for general purpose applications.How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments A. namely inductive loads (for example. In most control cabinets. contactors. relays. no further noise protection is necessary. on the coil of a control relay or motor starter). and switching gear.6 Noise Suppression at the Source Introduction Generally speaking. a relay switch in series with a relay coil) and contacts. (for example. Table A-2 lists part numbers for recommended MOV devices. Table A-2 MOV Devices Part Number Maximum AC Energy Pulse Rating Supplier (General Electric) 130V 10 Joules V130LA10A 30732481-501 275V 15 Joules V275LA15A 30732481-502 Figure A-2 is an illustration of transient suppression in inductive coils. when good wiring practices are used with well-designed digital electronic equipment.Appendix A . However. many manufacturers of these devices supply ’’surge suppressers’’ which mount directly on the noise source.Product Manual A-7 . For those devices that do not have accessory ’’surge suppressers. Inductive coils Metal Oxide Varistors (MOVs) are recommended for transient suppression in inductive coils.C. Metal oxide varistor A.’’ resistance-capacitance (RC) circuits and/or voltage limiters such as metal varistors may be added when and where needed. This can be broken down into two categories. the main sources of noise are motor starters. in some severe electrical environments.

a rule of thumb is to size the capacitor so that the number of microfarads equals the number of amperes in the load current. if there is no MOV or RC circuit. Table A-3 Coil Voltage vs. the energy may create a visible electrical arc across the open contacts. Resistor Voltage Rating Coil Voltage 115V 230V 460V 550V Resistor Voltage Rating 1/4 Watt 1 Watt 3 Watt 5 Watt Contacts When a contact interrupts an inductive load. results in electrical noise as well as damage to the contacts. This.5 microfarad. 1000V capacitor. For voltages above 2000 Vac. However. and the resistor has the same resistance value as the load. supply Inductive load 21462 Figure A-3 Contact Noise Suppression For large load currents. One way to eliminate this arc is to connect a resistor and capacitor across the contacts (see Figure A-3). an MOV across the contact may be added for extra protection. A combination of 47 ohms and 0. An MOV or RC circuit in parallel with the load provides a place where this energy may be dissipated.C.1 microfarads (1000 Vdc) is recommended for circuits up to 3 amps and 300 Vac. This consists of a 220-ohm resistor in series with a 0. The objective is to eliminate the visible arc. Figure A-3 is an illustration of a resistor and capacitor connected across a contact to eliminate electrical noise. in turn. A-8 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 1/99 . a certain amount of energy is stored in the load. The power rating of the resistor will depend on the voltage rating of the coil (see Table A-3).DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Additional protection may be provided by adding an RC circuit in parallel with the MOV. MOV R C A.

An RC network (47 ohms and 0.Appendix A . Similar RC networks are available from Electrocube Inc.Product Manual A-9 . supply + – R Inductive load Diode 21463 Figure A-4 DC Load Noise Suppression 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . (part number RG1782-3) and from Industrial Condensor Corporation.How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments Either discreet resistors and capacitors or packaged RC networks may be used. In DC circuits. the power dissipation under steady state condition can be eliminated by placing a diode (in series with a resistor) in parallel with the load (see Figure A-4).1 microfarad) is available from Honeywell as part number 30371852-001. D. Figure A-4 is an illustration of DC load noise suppression. The value of R should be less than or equal to the DC resistance of the inductive load.C.

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder A-10 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 1/99 .

Appendix B .01 degrees using the standard “ice bath” method of calibration.Accuracy B. (Field calibration requires model with display.Product Manual B-1 .2.2.1 Overview Reference accuracy The reference accuracy varies according to the type of input actuation.) The field-calibrated reference accuracy for each type of input actuation is also supplied in B. • Typical reference accuracy for each type of input is supplied in B. The figures include reference junction calibration of ±0. Accuracy B. • Factory accuracy may be improved by performing an input calibration (field calibration) as described in Section 5. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Model .

2 Typical Reference Accuracy Table B-1 Typical Reference Accuracy Types of Input Actuations Range Reference Accuracy* with Field Calibration °C 41 to 1816 66 to 260 260 to 538 538 to 1815 –270 to 1000 –270 to –130 –130 to 1000 –129 to 593 –18 to 871 –7 to 410 –196 to 1371 –29 to 538 0 to 1317 0 to 260 260 to 1371 –18 to 1200 –18 to 1704 –18 to 260 260 to 1704 –18 to 1704 –18 to 260 260 to 1704 –184 to 371 –129 to 316 –18 to 2316 –18 to 316 316 to 1982 1982 to 2316 ± °F ± °C Factory Accuracy* Temp Stability ± Degrees Error Per 1 Degree ∆T °F Thermocouples B 105 to 3300 150 to 500 500 to 1000 1000 to 3300 –454 to 1832 –454 to –202 –202 to 1832 –200 to 1100 0 to 1600 20 to 770 –320 to 2500 –20 to 1000` 32 to 2500 32 to 500 500 to 2500 0 to 2372 0 to 3100 0 to 500 500 to 3100 0 to 3100 0 to 500 500 to 3100 –300 to 700 –200 to 600 0 to 4200 0 to 600 600 to 3600 3600 to 4200 ± °F ± °C 28.40 1.0 36.Product Manual 1/99 .00385 ***Alpha = 0.00 0.8 0.21 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.01 degrees using the standard "ice bath" method of calibration.6 0.3 4 3 3 2 2 2 0.00391 B-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .21 0.8 2.0 1.2 16.6 3.20 0.0 1.5 0.15 0.0 3.3 1.1 0.0 1.8 37 18 79 14 11 7 6 9 7 12 9 11 26 13 23 13 13 7 19 13 27 21 10 44 8 6 4 3 5 4 7 5 6 14 7 13 7 7 4 11 7 15 4.15 0.3 0.0 2.0 1.4 0.14 0.00 1.8 0.8 2.40 0.15 0.70 0. Note that factory accuracy may have typical variations of ±150 microvolts or ±0.9 0.15 0.5 1.15 1.6 1.08 0.6 0.21 0.1 4.50 0.10 0.00 0.0 3.40 0. Factory accuracy at reference ±1.1 0.0 1.20 E E (low) J J (low) K K (low) Ni-Ni Moly Nicrosil-Nisil R S T T (low) W5W26 RTD Platinum 100 ohms** 100 ohms (low)** 100 ohms (T)*** –300 to 900 –130 to 392 –238 to 482 –184 to 482 –90 to 200 –150 to 250 0.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder B.6 0.8 2.2 2.1 2.50 0.50 0.0 2.6 ohms for RTDs which means field calibration may be required to achieve stated accuracy. **IEC Alpha = 0.0 4.6 1.4 1.2 1.0 2.5 1.15 0.9 0.5 1.0 6.5 1.0 2.2 1.15 *Includes reference junction calibration of ±0.7 20.2°F.

011%/°F 0.6 ohms for RTDs which means field calibration may be required to achieve stated accuracy. Continued Types of Input Actuations Range Reference Accuracy* with Field Calibration 16 µA 16 µA 10 µV 100 µV 200 µV 1 mV 2 mV 5 mV 4 mV 10 mV 8 mV Factory Accuracy* Temp Stability ± Degrees Error Per 1 Degree ∆T Linear Milliamperes dc Millivolts dc 0 to 20 4 to 20 0 to 10 0 to 100 0 to 200 0 to 1 0 to 2 0 to 5 1 to 5 0 to 10 2 to 10 80 µA 80 µA 50 µA 500 µA 1.011%/°F 0.011%/°F 0.Accuracy Table B-1 Typical Reference Accuracy.00385 ***Alpha = 0.011%/°F 0.011%/°F Volts dc *Includes reference junction calibration of ±0.011%/°F 0.Product Manual B-3 .01 degrees using the standard "ice bath" method of calibration.011%/°F 0.011%/°F 0.00391 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Model . Note that factory accuracy may have typical variations of ±150 microvolts or ±0.011%/°F 0.Appendix B . Factory accuracy at reference ±1.011%/°F 0. **IEC Alpha = 0.2°F.0 mV 5 mV 10 mV 25 mV 20 mV 50 mV 80 mV 0.011%/°F 0.

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder B-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 1/99 .

1 Single Range Charts Table C-1 lists the chart part numbers for the available 10-inch single range charts.Product Manual C-1 .Available 10-inch Charts C.Appendix C . Available 10-inch Charts C. Table C-1 10-inch Single Range Chart Part Numbers Chart Type B Thermocouple J Thermocouple 0 to 1800 –18 to 425 –45 to +150 –50 to +300 0 to 150 0 to 200 0 to 250 0 to 300 0 to 300 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 500 0 to 600 0 to 800 0 to 1000 0 to 1200 0 to 1600 10 to 340 10 to 76 50 to 1400 50 to 650 100 to 260 150 to 750 810 to 910 Range Units C C C F C F C F C F C F F F F F F C C F F C F F 230 24 HR P/N 24001660-XXX 135 028 027 019 070 114 024 002 062 012 063 013 003 014 015 004 018 057 030 029 056 094 150 024 002 062 006 063 007 008 009 010 011 018 057 030 029 056 028 027 019 070 7 DAY P/N 24001661-XXX Table C-1 continued on next page 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

Continued Chart Type K Thermocouple Range –18 to 1320 0 to 200 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 500 0 to 600 0 to 800 0 to 1000 0 to 1000 0 to 1200 0 to 1200 0 to 1600 0 to 2000 0 to 2400 800 to 1000 R Thermocouple 0 to 1600 0 to 2500 30 to 2900 800 to 2500 S Thermocouple 0 to 1600 0 to 3000 T Thermocouple –250 to +150 –130 to +410 –100 to +100 –90 to +210 0 to 100 0 to 150 0 to 300 75 to 200 +125 to -1-5 W5W26 Thermocouple 0 to 1800 C Units C C F C C C C F C F C F F F F C F F C C F F F C C C C C C 098 157 103 24 HR P/N 24001660-XXX 031 086 053 064 205 059 060 007 049 006 065 016 005 009 227 017 025 032 089 066 147 042 033 069 034 147 042 033 069 034 100 201 079 058 017 025 032 013 014 015 059 060 016 049 012 053 064 7 DAY P/N 24001661-XXX 031 Table C-1 continued on next page C-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 1/99 .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table C-1 10-inch Single Range Chart Part Numbers.

5 0 to .Product Manual C-3 . Continued Chart Type Linear Range –200 to +200 –100 to +200 –100 to +100 –85 to +190 –75 to +260 –60 to +215 –50 to +50 –40 to +10 –35 to +75 –30 to +100 –30 to +20 –18 to 94 –10 to 100 –5 to 50 0 to .Available 10-inch Charts Table C-1 10-inch Single Range Chart Part Numbers.2 0 to .Appendix C .1 0 to .6 0 to 1 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 5 0 to 8 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 14 0 to 14 0 to 15 0 to 20 0 to 24 0 to 25 0 to 30 FEET 095 040 PH MG/L MGD 175 074 212 076 168 036 073 119 071 085 071 196 095 040 076 168 036 211 C 022 170 171 172 C C F 023 210 204 035 149 197/022 170 171 172 203 202 217 129 074 F 232 201 179 178 088 218 142 023 179 Units 24 HR P/N 24001660-XXX 7 DAY P/N 24001661-XXX 199 178 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

8 4 to 10 5 to 9 10 to 20 20 to 120 40 to 70 PH METER 231 039 039 125 177 177 093 F GPM 113 123 208 111 176 176 202 219 120 001 054 180 010 050 037 011 052 223 137 173 108 109 004 050 037 005 001 Range Units 24 HR P/N 24001660-XXX 110 078 104 130 075 051 7 DAY P/N 24001661-XXX 041 Table C-1 continued on next page C-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .0 1.Product Manual 1/99 .2 to 2.3 to 1.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table C-1 10-inch Single Range Chart Part Numbers. Continued Chart Type Linear (continued) 0 to 40 0 to 45 0 to 50 0 to 55 0 to 70 0 to 80 0 to 100 0 to 120 0 to 150 0 to 200 0 to 300 0 to 350 0 to 400 0 to 600 0 to 750 0 to 800 0 to 1000 0 to 1200 0 to 1600 0 to 2000 0 to 2400 0 to 2500 0 to 7000 0 to 8000 0 to 25000 0.

00391 –200 to +100 –125 to +375 –100 to +50 –100 to +100 –100 to +200 –100 to +500 –85 to +190 –75 to +260 –50 to +25 –50 to +50 –30 to +170 –25 to +125 –20 to +30 0 to –100 0 to 60 0 to 120 0 to 150 0 to 250 0 to 400 49 to –95 50 to 100 50 to 150 C C C C C C C 061 116 116 F F F F C C C F C C C C F C F C 161 144 122 068 081 081 083 209 203 044 020 091 080 021 099 047 055 048 092 087 045 087 045 117 084 055 048 080 021 044 020 F F 008 038 132 131 140 Range Units 24 HR P/N 24001660-XXX 7 DAY P/N 24001661-XXX 141 003 038 Table C-1 continued on next page 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual C-5 . Continued Chart Type Linear (continued) 50 to 70 50 to 250 70 to 140 100 to 200 100 to 300 100 to 600 1500 to 2500 2250 to 2500 1300 to 3600 RTD-PT100 a=.Available 10-inch Charts Table C-1 10-inch Single Range Chart Part Numbers.Appendix C .

00391 (continued) 50 to 250 100 to 200 120 to –140 180 to 30 250 to 300 RTD-PT100 a=.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table C-1 10-inch Single Range Chart Part Numbers. Continued Chart Type RTD-PT100 a=.Product Manual 1/99 .00385 –100 to +100 –40 to +60 50 to 100 50 to 120 0 to 250 0 to 400 C F F F F C C Range Units 24 HR P/N 24001660-XXX 096 132 082 121 106 080 067 061 134 068 081 081 080 067 061 7 DAY P/N 24001661-XXX C-6 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

C/Linear Linear Deg.Available 10-inch Charts C. F/Linear %RH Linear Deg. F/Linear %RH 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 –40 to +150C 0 to 120F –90 to +190C –18 to +37C –40 to +300F 0 to 3000F 32 to 122F –125 to +375F –125 to 375F Linear Deg.2 Dual Range Charts Table C-2 lists the chart part numbers for the available 10-inch dual range charts. F Linear Deg.Product Manual C-7 .000 35 to 0 63 to 0 0 to 90 35 to 0 35 to 0 0 to 10 0 to 100 0 to 100 –30 to +70 0 to 14 –30 to +70 –80 to +20 30 to 40 0 to 100 20 to 0 0 to 100 0 to 14 0 to 2000F –87 to +191C 0 to 100 RH 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 RH 0 to 2000F 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 5000 0 to 100 637* 195 194 661* 645* 151* 640* 145* 660* 207 197 620* 661* 660* 097 609 097 213 174* 606* 138* 601 621* 601 653* 148* 606 603 603 24 HR P/N 24001660-XXX 200 600 600* 602* 633* 7 DAY P/N 24001661-XXX *minimum purchase required Table C-2 continued on next page 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . C/Linear 0 to 1400F –18 to +37C Range 2 0 to 3. F/K T/C Deg. C/Linear %RH Linear Deg. F Linear/RTD Deg. F/PSI Linear Linear Deg. Table C-2 10-inch Dual Range Chart Part Numbers Calibration Linear/Linear Range 1 0 to 15 –100 to +200 0 to 200 0 to 2000 –18 to +94 –18 to +94 –22 to +158 0 to 50 0 to 60 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 40 to 140 50 to 150 50 to 150 50 to 150 Linear %/Linear PH Linear/K T/C Deg.000. F/Linear Linear Deg. C Linear Deg.Appendix C . C/Linear Linear Deg. F/Linear Linear Deg.

Continued Calibration Linear GPM/Linear PH Range 1 0 to 100 0 to 250 Linear PSI/Linear GPM J T/C Deg. F/Linear 0 to 15 0 to 600F 0 to 300F 0 to 300F 0 to 400F 0 to 400F 0 to 600F 0 to 300F J T/C Deg. F/Linear RTD Deg. C/Linear –100 to +100C –80 to +180C RTD Deg. F/K T/C Deg. C J T/C Deg. C/K T/C Deg. F 0 to 300F 0 to 600F K T/C Deg. F/Linear –100 to +900F 0 to 2000F 500 to 2000F T T/C Deg.5 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 160 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 35 to 0 0 to 100 35 to 0 35 to 0 608* 607* 638* 638* 607* 657* 152* 102* 616* 101* 647* 617* 656* 124* 629* 611* 636* 143* 112* 026* 649* 651* 186 604* 635* 163* 127* 153* 643* 631* 162* 026* 617* 24 HR P/N 24001660-XXX 7 DAY P/N 24001661-XXX 214 200 204 *minimum purchase required Table C-2 continued on next page C-8 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . F/J T/C Deg. F 95 to 455F 1300 to 2000F 0 to 300F J T/C Deg.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Table C-2 10-inch Dual Range Chart Part Numbers. C/Linear T T/C Deg. C 0 to 300C –18 to +315C J T/C Deg.Product Manual 1/99 . F/J T/C Deg. F/Linear –87 to +191C 50 to 250F –50 to +300F T T/C Deg. C/Linear 100 to 300F –5 to +50C –10 to +60C –35 to +75C –76 to +100C –50 to +100C –76 to +100C –75 to +1800C Range 2 0 to 14 0 to 14 0 to 7800 0 to 2000 PSI 0 to 100 0 to 400 0 to 100 0 to 800 0 to 100 0 to 500 0 to 1200C –18 to +1315C 35 to 235C 400 to 800F 0 to 1600F 0 to 1500F 0 to 2400F 0 to 10 0 to 2 0 to 1.

C 14 to 122F –10 to +50C Range 2 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 1000 0 to 50 0 to 1000 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 160 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 25 50 to 120C –87.Appendix C .Available 10-inch Charts Table C-2 10-inch Dual Range Chart Part Numbers. Continued Calibration RTD Deg. C/Linear –100 to +100C –18 to +94C RTD Deg.3 to +93. C/RTD Deg. C/Linear Range 1 –85 to +190C –85 to +190C –5 to +50C 12 to 93C 50 to 150C RTD Deg. F/Linear –50 to +250F 50 to 250F 0 to 300F 100 to 300F –10 to +60F RTD Deg.2 to +177C 104 to 212F 40 to 100C 206 619* 618* 632* 652* 616* 628* 155* 222 641* 628* 644* 646* 642* 626* 24 HR P/N 24001660-XXX 154* 659* 627* 7 DAY P/N 24001661-XXX *minimum purchase required 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . F RTD Deg. F/RTD Deg. C/RTD Deg. C/Linear PSIA RTD Deg.Product Manual C-9 . C 0 to 150C 0 to 100C –23.3C RTD Deg.

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder C-10 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 1/99 .

be sure to tune both control loops independently with the correct input (1 or 2) on the operator interface display. control tuning consists of determining the appropriate values for the Gain (PB). or Duplex Time Proportional control.1 Overview Introduction When you tune a control output. Rate (Derivative).Appendix D . Rate. You must know the type of control and algorithm your recorder has. An alternate approach is to rely on a tuning technique. you should at least obtain a reasonable starting point from which the desired response characteristics can be obtained. It depends on the process characteristics and the desired control response. Tuning technique You can estimate a starting point and the tuning parameters required to give the desired control response and with some experience become proficient with this method. In practice. and Reset (Integral) time tuning parameters (control constants) that will give the control you want. thus. you may not need a combination of all three.Product Manual D-1 . Two pen recorders If you have a 2-pen recorder with a control loop for each pen. Control tuning procedures There are two procedures for tuning the control output: • • Time or Current Proportional simplex control. Time Constants. However. some final adjustments to the tuning parameters must be made. Since each parameter responds to a specific characteristic of the deviation. tuning techniques usually do not give exactly the type of response desired. Manual Tuning D. Depending on the characteristics of the deviation of the process variable from the setpoint. and Reset time constants for your process. there are some things to consider: • • Process Characteristics .Minimal overshoot Basically. and The suggested procedures describe how to establish and store values of Gain (PB). etc. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Desired response .Gain.Manual Tuning D. the tuning parameters interact to alter the control output and produce changes in the value of the process variable.

00 minutes) or set repeats/min (IRPM) to the minimum value to minimize reset action.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder D. but all of the elements of the loop must be within the operating range (that is. increase GAIN (decrease PB) by a factor of 2 and repeat steps 4 to 6. 3 4 5 6 7 Increase GAIN (decrease PB) significantly. • If the oscillation matches pattern B. Try a factor of 10. Increase the setpoint by 5 or 10% and observe the process variable response.8 and repeat steps 4 to 6 The amplitude of the cycle is immaterial.2 Time or Current Proportional Simplex Control Procedure The procedure listed in Table D-1 gives you the steps for manually tuning a recorder with Time or Current proportional simplex control. set the CYCLE TIME (CYCT1) to 4 seconds and DEADBAND (DBAND) to 0. If it does not oscillate. continue to step 7. • If the oscillation matches pattern C. Adjust the setpoint to equal PV and switch to automatic control mode. go to step 8. and repeat step 5. Set the rate time (RATET) to 0 minutes and set the reset time (IMIN) to the maximum value (50. Table D-1 is continued on next page D-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . If the PV oscillates. If applicable. Table D-1 Manual Tuning Procedure for Simplex Control Step 1 2 Action In manual mode. decrease GAIN (increase PB) by a factor of 0. return to the original setpoint and increase GAIN (decrease PB) again by a factor of 2.5. Compare the oscillations with the figure below: Process Variable Pattern A Amplitude Pattern B Pattern C Time for one cycle Time 21457 • If the oscillation matches pattern A.Product Manual 1/99 . 8 Record the current value of GAIN (or PB) and measure and record the value of time for one completed oscillation of PV. adjust the output to bring the PV (Process Variable) near the desired value. the valve must not go full open or closed).

and RESET in minutes (IMIN) (or repeats per minute (IRPM)) into the recorder and verify that the PV response is adequate.Product Manual D-3 .Appendix D .Manual Tuning Table D-1 Manual Tuning Procedure for Simplex Control. Enter the values of GAIN (GN) (or PB). compare the pen trace with those in Figure D-1 to determine if any further fine tuning is required.2 RATE = 0 Proportional + Reset + Rate (PID) GAIN = Measured Gain x 0. Make additional trimming adjustments. Use the values of Gain (or PB) and time (in minutes) in the formulas to arrive at the recorder’s tuning parameters settings.7 RESET ACTION = 2 Measured Time RATE = Measured Time 8 10 Minutes Repeat GAIN = Measured Gain x 0. compare the pen traces to those in Figure D-2 to determine if any further fine tuning is required.02 (repeats/minute) RATE = 0 %PB = Measured PB x 2.2 RESET ACTION = 1. Manual tuning formulas Table D-2 lists the formulas used in the procedure listed in Table D-1.00 (minimum reset) RATE = 0 Proportional + Reset (PI) (No Rate) GAIN = Measured Gain x 0.6 RESET TIME = Measured Time 2 RATE = Measured Time 8 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . to fine tune the recorder per the guidelines shown in the figures. RATE (RATET). • If you are using proportional control with manual reset.5 RESET TIME = 50. and/or plus rate.2 (R/M) Measured Time RATE = 0 %PB = Measured PB x 1. Continued Step 9 Action Select the proper set of formulas from Table D-2.5 RESET TIME = Measured Time (M/R) 1. • If you are using proportional control plus reset. Table D-2 Manual Tuning Formulas Units GAIN and RESET TIME in Proportional (P) only % PROPORTIONAL BAND and RESET ACTION in Repeats Minutes %PB = Measured PB x 2 RESET ACTION = 0. if necessary.

band Increase prop.Product Manual 1/99 . band Decrease gain Wide prop. band Increase gain Just right Small offset* Overshoot Small offset* Large Overshoot Fast swings Slow swings Very small offset Large offset Small offset* Initial cycling decreasing Process or ambient changes Very small offset Large offset Little or no overshoot Overshoot Initial cycling decreases Steady pen indication Steady pen indication Small offset* Startup Operational *Eliminate small offset by adjusting Manual Reset. Cause: Cure: Slow cycling (time prop. Cause: Cure: High rate Correct PB* No reset Reduce rate Correct rate Correct PB* No reset Add reset High reset Correct rate Correct PB* Reduce reset All settings correct Little or no Overshoot Fast Cycling Small offset* Offset Very slow recovery Small offset* No Overshoot Overshoot Slow continuous cycling Slight Overshoot Striaght line control Process or ambient changes Startup Operational * Or gain 21459 Figure D-2 Pen Traces (Proportional Plus Reset and/or Plus Rate) D-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . 21458 Figure D-1 Pen Traces (Proportional Plus Manual Reset) Pen traces (proportional plus reset and/or plus rate) Figure D-2 shows the pen traces identifying the need for tuning constant adjustment (proportional plus reset and/or plus rate). band Decrease prop.) Increase cycle rate Narrow prop.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Pen traces (proportional plus manual reset) Figure D-1 shows the pen traces identifying the need for tuning constant adjustment (proportional plus manual reset).

Tune the control output with the output above 50% for heat and below 50% for cool. HEAT/COOL prompts The “TUNING” function prompts for HEAT/COOL are: HEAT GAIN (PB or GN) RESET (I RPM or I MIN) RATE (RATET) CYCLE (CYCTI) COOL GAIN2 (PB2 or GN2) RESET2 (I2 RPM or I2 MIN) RATE2 (RATE2T) CYCLE2 (CYC2TI) 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Manual Tuning D.Appendix D .3 Time Proportional Duplex Control Introduction For HEAT/COOL applications.Product Manual D-5 .

Product Manual 1/99 .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder D-6 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

• There can be overlap between programs. A total of twenty-four program segments are available. and for executing the program at runtime. During a soak segment the setpoint is held at the specified value. The ramp is configured in terms of ramp time or ramp rate. Odd-numbered segments are always ramp segments.5 Run/Monitor the Program See Page E-1 E-2 E-4 E-8 E-11 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . and 6.E. Program 2 could be configured to begin with Segment 5 and end with Segment 8.E. For example. 4.4 Setpoint Program Prompt Hierarchy E. Note that Section 4 contains instructions for using the single setpoint ramp supported by all DR4300 models.1 Overview Introduction As an option. Even-numbered segments are always soaks.Appendix E . 3. Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming and Operation E. The Manual/Auto mode will be as configured under “PWR UP” in the “CONTROL” group. 2. In a ramp segment the setpoint value is changed as specified during configuration. twelve ramp and twelve soak segments. You designate the beginning and end segments to determine where the program will start or stop.2 Program Contents E.1 Overview E. ATTENTION If power is lost during execution of a program. • Recorder must be set to use SP1 (setpoint 1) • Only contiguous segments can be used by a program. The SPRAMP (single setpoint ramp) parameter described in Section 4 must be set to DIS (disabled) if a setpoint program is to be used.Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming and Operation E. upon power-up the recorder will use the last setpoint value prior to the beginning of the setpoint program. depending on how you have configured the RPUNIT (ramp unit) parameter.E.Product Manual E-1 . • Every program must start with a ramp segment and end on a soak segment.E. The program is placed in hold at the beginning. What’s in this section? This section contains the following information: Topic E. This appendix contains instructions for setting up a setpoint program. the recorder can support the programming and execution of a setpoint program (profile). Program 1 could use Segments 1. 5. These ramp and soak segments can be used in up to four programs.3 Drawing a Ramp/Soak Profile E.

Degrees/MinuteRange = 0 to 999 EU-H* . Ramps are specifed in terms of either: TIME* .2 Program Contents What you will configure You will configure all the data that is relevant to each ramp and soak segment for a given setpoint versus time program (profile). • Range = 0 to 99 Program state The program state selection determines the program state after completion. in sequence. The selections are: • • DIS = program is disabled HOLD = program on hold Ramp time or rate segments A ramp segment is used to change the setpoint to the next soak setpoint value in the program.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder E. E-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Ramp unit The ramp unit selection determines the engineering units for the ramp segments. All prompts are listed.Hours:MinutesRange = 0-99 hrs:59 min. or EU-M* .Degrees/Hour * The selection of time or rate is made at prompt “RP UNIT” Set this prompt before entering any Ramp information. • • Ramps are odd-numbered segments. in Table E-1.Product Manual 1/99 . Segment 1 will be the initial ramp. ATTENTION Entering “0” will imply an immediate step change in setpoint to the next soak. The selections are: • • TIME = Hours:Minutes EU-H = Degrees/Hour OR EU-M = Degrees/Minute Recycle number The recycle number allows the program to recycle a specified number of times from beginning to end. The recorder will prompt you through the sequence of segments and associated functions.

Hours:MinutesRange = 0-99 hrs:59 min. In this case.) Soak time is the duration of the soak and is determined in: TIME . soak segments start timing soak duration as soon as the soak setpoint is first reached. regardless of where the process variable remains relative to the soak setpoint during the duration of the segment.Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming and Operation Soak segments A soak segment is a combination of soak setpoint (value) and a soak duration (time). the recorder will use the setpoint achieved during the last soak segment. • Range = 1 to 23 (odd-numbered segments only) End segment number for each program The end segment number designates the number of the last segment. Digital input (remote) operation Program can be placed in RUN or HOLD state through a remote dry contact connected to optional digital input terminals. • At the conclusion of program execution. If its value is not zero. • • • Soaks are even-numbered segments. The soak setpoint range value must be within the setpoint high and low range limits in engineering units. • Range = 2 to 24 (even-numbered segments only) Guaranteed soak A SOKDEV (soak deviation) parameter is provided. it must be a soak segment (evennumbered). The REMSW1 and REMSW2 parameters mus be configured to support this function. and lower display will flash “run n” HOLD—contact closure places program in HOLD state.Product Manual E-3 . and lower display will flash “hold” Opening contact reverts to original state. (Specify the setpoint range with SP HI and SP LO in the control group as described in Section 4. The decimal location corresponds to input 1 decimal selection. then soaking will be frozen for each segment until the difference (plus or minus) between PV and SP is less than or equal to the value of SOKDEV. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Appendix E . • Start segment number for each program The start segment number designates the number of the first segment. The valid values for those parameters are: • • RUN—contact closure places program in RUN state. There are no guaranteed soaks whenever SOKDEV = 0. Segment 2 will be the initial soak value and soak time.

2hrs:30min. 400 1 hr. 300 1hr. we recommend that you draw your Ramp/Soak profiles in the space provided on the blank graphs and fill in the associated information on the worksheet. 0 400 0hr.:0min.3 Drawing a Ramp/Soak Profile Ramp/soak profile example Before you perform the actual configuration. 1hr. 200 0hr. Value Prompt SG6 SP SG6 TI SG7 RP SG8 SP SG8 TI SG9 RP SG10 SP SG10 TI SG11 RP SG12 SP SG12TI Function Soak SP Soak Time Ramp Soak SP Soak Time Ramp Soak SP Soak Time Ramp Soak SP Soak Time Segment 6 6 7 8 8 9 10 10 11 12 12 250 3hrs.:30 min.:30 min. End Seg.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder E. Value E-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Start setpoint in this example is at 200 °F. 3hrs:30min.Product Manual 1/99 .:30 min.:30 min.:30 min. 1hr. Setpoint 500 SEG 8 SEG 9 400 °F F 300 SEG 4 SEG 5 SEG 3 SEG 2 SEG 7 SG 10 SG 11 SEG 1 200 Time/Hours 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 SEG 6 SG 12 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20765 Figure E-1 Ramp/Soak Profile Example Prompt START1 END 1 RECYCL SOKDEV RP UNIT END ST SG1 RP SG2 SP SG2 TI SG3 RP SG4 SP SG4 TI SG5 RP Function Start Seg. Number of Recycles Deviation Value Ramp Units Program State at end Ramp Soak SP Soak Time Ramp Soak SP Soak Time Ramp 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 Segment 1 12 2 0 TIME HOLD 1 hr. An example of a Ramp-Soak Profile using the first twelve segments for Program 1 is shown in Figure E-1. 500 0hr.

20766 20766 20766 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Appendix E .Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming and Operation Profile graphs Draw your ramp/soak profiles on the graphs below and fill in the associated information in the worksheet. This will give you a permanent record of your program and will assist you when entering the ramp and soak values.Product Manual E-5 .

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder 20766 20766 20766 E-6 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 1/99 .

Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming and Operation Profile worksheet Prompt START1 END 1 START2 END 2 START3 END 3 START4 END 4 SOKDEV RP UNIT END ST SG1 RP SG2 SP SG2 TI SG3 RP SG4 SP SG4 TI SG5 RP SG6 SP SG6 TI SG7 RP SG8 SP SG8 TI Function Start Seg Prog 1 End Seg Prog 1 Start Seg Prog 2 End Seg Prog 2 Start Seg Prog 3 End Seg Prog 3 Start Seg Prog 4 End Seg Prog 4 Deviation Value Ramp Units Program State at end Ramp Soak SP Soak Time Ramp Soak SP Soak Time Ramp Soak SP Soak TIme Ramp Soak SP Soak TIme Segment Value Prompt SG9 RP SG10SP SG10TI SG11RP SG12SP SG12TI SG13RP SG14SP SG14TI SG15RP SG16SP Function Ramp Soak SP Soak TIme Ramp Soak SP Soak TIme Ramp Soak SP Soak TIme Ramp Soak SP Soak TIme Ramp Soak SP Soak TIme Ramp Soak SP Soak TIme Ramp Soak SP Soak TIme Ramp Soak SP Soak Time Segment 9 10 10 11 12 12 13 14 14 15 16 16 17 18 18 19 20 20 21 22 22 23 24 24 Value 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 8 8 SG16TI SG17RP SG18SP SG18TI SG19RP SG20SP SG20TI SG21RP SG22SP SG22TI SG23RP SG24SP SG24TI 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual E-7 .Appendix E .

9. 22.16. RECYCLES—Enter the number of times the program selected for execution will be repeated. and for the associated operating parameters to be displayed.11.4.8.20.6. 21.18. 21.17.5.14. 22.13.17.23 [factory setting=7] 2.24 [factory setting=24] 0 to 99 [factory setting=0] -99.24 [factory setting=12] 1.16. There are no guaranteed soaks if SOKDEV = 0. END SEGMENT FOR PROGRAM 2—Enter the number of the last segment in Program 2.13.12.11.8.5. END SEGMENT FOR PROGRAM 3—Enter the number of the last segment in Program 3.18.7. START SEGMENT FOR PROGRAM 2—Enter the number of the first segment in Program 2. These prompts are available when SPPROG is enabled in the SPRAMP set up group described in Section 4.4. 21.23 [factory setting=1] 2.17.4. If the PV differs from the setpoint by more than the value of SOKDEV.13.7. 22.6.) DIS ENAB START 1 END 1 START 2 END 2 START 3 END 3 START 4 END 4 RECYCL SOKDEV 1.24 [factory setting=18] 1.12.23 [factory setting=19] 2. (See Section 4.10.14.15.7.10.10.9.5. 22.00] E-8 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .20.19.8.14.19.9 to 99.3.11. soak time is frozen. END SEGMENT FOR PROGRAM 4—Enter the number of the last segment in Program 4. Table E-1 Prompt Hierarchy and Available Selections Lower Display Prompt SPPROG Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition SETPOINT PROGRAMMING—This must be set to ENAB for the setpoint program feature to work.9.6.19.16.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder E.18.4. SOAK DEVIATION—Enter the acceptable deviation from setpoint during a soak cycle. 21.3.11.3.17.15.9. SPRAMP must be disabled.6. START SEGMENT FOR PROGRAM 4—Enter the number of the first segment in Program 4. END SEGMENT FOR PROGRAM 1—Enter the number of the last segment in Program 1.4 Setpoint Program Prompt Hierarchy Table E-1 lists all the function prompts for Setpoint Program data configuration in the order of their appearance.13.9 engineering units DIS—Disabled ENAB—Enabled START SEGMENT FOR PROGRAM 1—Enter the number of the first segment in Program 1.15.19. All parameters may be changed while the program is disabled or in HOLD.20.Product Manual 1/99 .10. [factory setting=0.24 [factory setting=6] 1.20.12.7.23 [factory setting=13] 2.14.3. START SEGMENT FOR PROGRAM 3—Enter the number of the first segment in Program 3.15.8.16.5.12.18.

Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming and Operation Lower Display Prompt RPUNIT Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition RAMP UNITS—The selection you make here will determine whether the ramp segments will be configured in terms of time or in terms of rate. Engineering Units per Minute—Ramps will be configured as a rate in EU-M. [factory setting=0. [factory setting=0.Appendix E . or be placed in Hold. Engineering Units per Hour—Ramps will be configured as a rate in EU-H. TIME [factory setting] EU-M EU-H END ST SG1 RP DISABLE [factory setting] HOLD 0 to 99 hours:0 to 59 min (if RPUNIT = TIME) or 0 to 999 degrees per minute or hour (if RPUNIT = EU-M or EU-H) TIME—Ramps will be configured in hrs:min.00] SG2 SP SG2 TI SG3 RP range depends on setpoint SEGMENT 2 SETPOINT—Enter the setpoint for limits [factory setting=0] Segment 2. Whether ramp segments are configured in terms of time or rate depends on whether RPUNIT is set to TIME or EU-M/EU-H. END STATE—Specify whether the program will be disabled after execution.Product Manual E-9 . 0 to 99 hours:0 to 59 min [factory setting=0] SEGMENT 4 TIME—Enter the duration for Segment 4 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .00] SG4 SP SG4 TI range depends on setpoint SEGMENT 4 SETPOINT—Enter the setpoint for limits [factory setting 0] Segment 4. SEGMENT 1 RAMP VALUE—Enter the ramp time or ramp value for Segment 1. 0 to 99 hours:0 to 59 min [factory setting=0] 0 to 99 hours:0 to 59 min (if RPUNIT = TIME) or 0 to 999 degrees per minute or hour (if RPUNIT = EU-M or EU-H) SEGMENT 2 TIME—Enter the duration for Segment 2 SEGMENT 3 RAMP VALUE—Enter the ramp time or ramp value for Segment 3.

SG23 RP 0 to 99 hours:0 to 59 min (if RPUNIT = TIME) or 0 to 999 degrees per minute or hour (if RPUNIT = EU-M or EU-H) [factory setting = 0.Product Manual 1/99 . .00] SG24 SP SG24 TI SEGMENT 23 RAMP VALUE—Enter the ramp time or ramp value for Segment 23. range depends on setpoint SEGMENT 24 SETPOINT—Enter the setpoint for limits [factory setting = 0] Segment 24. 0 to 99 hours:0 to 59 min [factory setting = 0] SEGMENT 24 TIME—Enter the duration for Segment 24 E-10 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . . .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Lower Display Prompt . . Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition Continue to configure ramp segments (odd-numbered) and soak segments (even-numbered) through Segments 23 and 24. .

(See Table E-1. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual E-11 . Run/Monitor functions Table E-2 lists all the functions required to run and monitor the program. (If control set up group NumSPs = TWO. use UseSP1.Appendix E . Table E-2 Run/Monitor Functions Function Set the Local Setpoint DISPLAY Press You will see Upper Display Result input value Lower Display SP and local setpoint value.) To set the Local Setpoint value to where you want the program to start out.Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming and Operation E.) “HOLD” appears periodically in the lower display indicating that the program is in the HOLD state. ATTENTION SP Programm parameters cannot be changed during RUN state (must be in HOLD state). make sure the recorder is set to use setpoint 1 by checking that operating parameter UseSP1 is displayed. or to switch to If UseSP2 is displayed.5 Run/Monitor the Program Introduction Prior to running the program. Selecting the Program to be Run until DISPLAY Lower Display SPRGn To select the program where n is the program number 1 through 4. make sure all the SPPROG prompts under the SPRAMP set up group have been configured with the required data.

then when the contact n closes. Viewing the Present Ramp or Soak Segment Number and Time Upper Display DISPLAY input value Lower Display until you see XX HH . the program will be run (if the setpoint program is enabled).Product Manual 1/99 . Contact reopening runs the program. The “hold” in the lower display will be displayed periodically in lower case. MM Time remaining in the SEGMENT in hours and minutes XX = 1 to 24 E-12 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . ATTENTION The keypad takes priority over the external switch for the RUN/HOLD function. and REMSWn is set to RUN. Contact reopening holds the program. ATTENTION The keypad takes priority over the external switch for the RUN/HOLD function.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Function Putting the Program in the Run State Press until DISPLAY Result Lower Display HOLD to toggle from “HOLD” to Lower Display RUN to indicate that the program is running. External Hold If the recorder supports digital inputs. Putting the Program in the Hold State until DISPLAY Lower Display RUN to toggle from “RUN” to Lower Display HOLD to hold the program at the current setpoint. the program will be placed in hold (if the setpoint program is running). External Run If the recorder supports digital inputs. then when the contact n closes. and REMSWn is set to HOLD. The “run n” in the lower display will be displayed periodically in lower case.

or disappears (if configured for disable of setpoint programming).Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming and Operation Function Viewing the Number of Cycles Left for the Program Press Upper Display DISPLAY Result input value Lower Display until you see REC.Product Manual E-13 . the “RUN” in the lower display either changes to “HOLD” (if configured for HOLD state). The recorder will operate at the last setpoint achieved by the program.X Number of cycles remaining in the setpoint program X = 0 to 99 Ending the Program When the final segment is completed. Upper Display SETUP SETUP Disable Program until you see Lower Display SPRAMP Upper Display FUNCTION ENAB until you see Lower Display SPPROG Upper Display or until you see DISPLAY DIS Lower Display SPPROG Exit configuration and program is disabled.Appendix E . 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder E-14 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Product Manual 1/99 .

• Accutune works for integrating processes.1 Overview Introduction Accutune II provides foolproof.Appendix F .1 Overview F.3 Using Accutune with Duplex (Heat/Cool) Control See Page F-1 F-2 F-3 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .Using Accutune II F. including integrating type processes. • Accutune works for all control algorithms except ON/OFF. and begins PID control with the correct tuning parameters. The tuning sequence will cycle the recorder’s output two full cycles between 0% and 100% (or low and high output limits) while allowing only a very small process variable change above and below the setpoint during each cycle. Detailed instructions for using Accutune are provided in this appendix. trouble-free on-demand tuning in the recorder. What’s in this section? This section contains the following information: Topic F. The recorder immediately starts controlling to the setpoint while it identifies the process.Product Manual F-1 . Using Accutune II F. No knowledge of the process is required at start-up. Enable/disable Accutune using the tuning set up group TUNE parameter described in Section 4. • The recorder must be in Auto mode. The operator simply enters the desired setpoint and initiates the tuning. and allows retuning at a fixed setpoint. This works with any process. calculates the tuning constants and enters them into the tuning set up group.2 Starting and Stopping Tuning with Accutune II F.

To abort tuning in progress. When tuning has been completed the lower display will again show “TuneOF”. then Accutune is not enabled. use the procedure in Table F-1 to start tuning. press the MAN/AUTO/RESET key to take the recorder out of Auto mode.Product Manual 1/99 . The tuning parameters will retain the values they had at the start of the Accutune operation. The message “AbRT” (abort) will be displayed as the value of tuning set up group parameter “AT ERR”.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder F.2 Starting and Stopping Tuning with Accutune II Procedure After “TUNE” has been enabled in the tuning set up group as described in Section 4. until you see 2 or to toggle to Lower Display TuneON Tuning will begin and the lower display will flash “TUNING”. Table F-1 Procedure for Starting Accutune II Step 1 DISP Press Lower Display TuneOF Action/Result If “TuneOF” (tune off) does not appear. F-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

until you see 2 or Make sure the recorder is in Auto mode. 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . Likewise. If it is not “USESP1”. (“A” indicator lit. it assumes tuning at Local SP 2 will cause a Cooling demand. Accutune II assumes SP 1 will cause a Heating demand. use or to switch to “USESP1”.Appendix F . Procedure After “TUNE” has been enabled in the tuning set up group as described in section 4. Note that control group parameter “NumSPs” must be set to “TWO” to enable the second setpoint. use the MAN/AUTO/RESET key to put the unit in Auto.Using Accutune II F. and then the calculated tuning parameters will be automatically entered as the first set of PID constants. Table F-2 Procedure for Using Accutune for Duplex Control Step Heating Tuning 1 DISP Lower Display SP nnn Press Action/Result Display Setpoint 1. then Accutune is not enabled.) If not. Until the value of Setpoint 1 is at the desired value within the Heat zone. use the procedure in Table F-2 to start tuning.3 Using Accutune with Duplex (Heat/Cool) Control Introduction “TUNE” can be done for applications using Duplex (Heat/Cool) control. 3 DISP Lower Display until you see 4 DISP This is the prompt used to select the setpoint. Lower Display TuneOF UseSPn until you see If “TuneOF” (tune off) does not appear. To abort tuning in progress. During tuning. press the MAN/AUTO/RESET key to take the recorder out of Auto mode.Product Manual F-3 . and the cooling parameters will be entered as the second set of PID constants. The message “AbRT” (abort) will be displayed as the value of tuning set up group parameter “AT ERR”. The tuning parameters will retain the values they had at the start of the Accutune operation.

Product Manual 1/99 . Lower Display UseSP2 10 DISP Lower Display TuneOF until you see 11 or to toggle to Lower Display TuneON Tuning will begin and the lower display will flash “TUNING”. until you see 7 or Until the value of Setpoint 2 is at the desired value within the Cooling zone. The Cool tuning parameters are entered for the second set of PID constants in the tuning set up group. Cooling Tuning 6 DISP Lower Display S2 nnn Display Setpoint 2. When tuning has been completed the lower display will again show “TuneOF”. The output will cycle between 0% and 50% (or low output limit). 8 DISP Lower Display UseSP1 until you see 9 or to toggle to.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Step 5 Press to toggle to or Lower Display TuneON Action/Result Tuning will begin and the lower display will flash “TUNING”. The output will cycle between 50% and 100% (or high output limit). F-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . When tuning has been completed the lower display will again show “TuneOF”. The Heat tuning parameters are entered for the first set of PID constants in the tuning set up group.

Appendix G – Foreign Language Safety InstructionsI G.Product Manual G-1 . Foreign Language Safety Instructions 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Handelskai 388 A1023 VIENNA AUSTRIA Tel. Spol. Bâtiment « le Mercury » Parc Technologique de St Aubin Route de l’Orme 91190 SAINT-AUBIN FRANCE Tel. : 852 829 82 98 AUSTRALIA HONEYWELL LIMITED 5 Thomas Holt Drive North Ryde Sydney NSW AUSTRALIA 2113 Tel. ONTARIO CANADA Tel.m. Room 3213-3225 Sun Kung Kai Centre N° 30 Harbour Road WANCHAI HONG KONG Tel. : 42 2 6112 2777 DENMARK HONEYWELL A/S Lyngby Hovedgade 98 2800 LYNGBY DENMARK Tel. BELGRANO 1156 BUENOS AIRES ARGENTINA Tel. : 43 1 727 800 BELGIUM HONEYWELL S. : 54 1 383 9290 ASIA PACIFIC HONEYWELL ASIA PACIFIC Inc.A.r. Budejovicka 1 140 00 Praha 4 Czech Republic Tel. from France: 01 60 19 80 00 From other countries: 33 1 60 19 80 00 GERMANY HONEYWELL AG Kaiserleistrasse 39 Postfach 10 08 65 D-63067 OFFENBACH/MAIN GERMANY Tel.A.b. : 416 502 5200 CZECH REPUBLIC HONEYWELL.Appendix H – Honeywell Service Centers H.H. Avenue de Schipol. : 61 2 353 7000 AUSTRIA HONEYWELL AUSTRIA G.s. 3 1140 BRUSSELS BELGIUM Tel.A.C. : 55 11 819 3755 CANADA HONEYWELL LIMITED THE HONEYWELL CENTRE 529 Mc Nicoll Avenue M2H 2C9 NORTH YORK. : 45 45 93 56 56 FINLAND HONEYWELL OY Ruukintie 8 FIN-02320 ESPOO 32 FINLAND Tel. : 49 69 80 640 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . : 32 2 728 27 11 BRAZIL HONEYWELL DO BRAZIL AND CIA Rua Jose Alves Da Chunha Lima 172 BUTANTA 05360.Product Manual H-1 .050 SAO PAULO SP BRAZIL Tel.o. : 358 0 3480101 FRANCE HONEYWELL S. Honeywell Service Centers ARGENTINA HONEYWELL S.I.

B. : 7095 29 92 531 SLOVAK REPUBLIC HONEYWELL Trnavska 3 831 04 BRATISLAVA SLOVAKIA Tel.Product Manual 1/99 . : 46 8 775 55 00 H-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . 24 PO Box 29106 28027 MADRID SWEDEN HONEYWELL A. : 351 1 4172 602 REPUBLIC OF IRELAND HONEYWELL Unit 5 Long Mile Road DUBLIN 12 Republic of Ireland Tel. DE CV AV. : 47 66 90 20 30 POLAND HONEYWELL Ltd UI Augustowka 3 PL-02981 WARSAW POLAND Tel. : 42 7 526 1409 SOUTH AFRICA HONEYWELL LTD 34 Harry Street Robertsham JOHANNESBURG 2091 REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA Tel.13 SU 10 3001 MOSCOW Tel. 2/b 20063 Cernusco Sul Naviglio ITALY Tel. Storsatragrand 5 S-127 86 Skarholmen STOCKHOLM SWEDEN Tel.p. LOMAS ALTAS 11950 MEXICO CITY MEXICO Tel. : 31 20 56 56 911 NORWAY HONEYWELL A/S Askerveien 61 PO Box 263 N-1371 ASKER NORWAY Tel. : 48 2 642 25 70 PORTUGAL HONEYWELL PORTUGAL LDA Edificio Suecia II Av. do Forte nr 3 . : 27 11 680 3440 SPAIN HONEYWELL Josefa Valcarcel. : 65 2490 100 RUSSIA HONEYWELL INC Tryokhprundny Pereulok 11. Gobetti.A. Via P.Piso 3 CARNAXIDE 2795 LINDA A VELHA PORTUGAL Tel. : 353 1 4565944 REP. PARK 1646 SINGAPORE REP. : 39 02 92146 1 MEXICO HONEYWELL S.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder HUNGARY HONEYWELL Kft Volgy U 30 H-1026 BUDAPEST HUNGARY Tel. : 52 5 259 1966 NETHERLANDS HONEYWELL BV Laaderhoogtweg 18 NL-1101 EA AMSTERDAM ZO THE NETHERLANDS Tel.A. : 36 1 116 76 59 ITALY HONEYWELL S. CONSTITUYENTES 900 COL. OF SINGAPORE HONEYWELL PTE LTD BLOCK 750E CHAI CHEE ROAD 06-01 CHAI CHEE IND. OF SINGAPORE Tel.

A. HONEYWELL INC. 1100 VIRGINIA DRIVE PA 19034-3260 FT. : 34 91 32 02 112 SWITZERLAND HONEYWELL A. : 44 344 826 000 U. : 58 2 239 0211 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .S.G. Hertistrasse 2 8304 WALLISELLEN SWITZERLAND Tel. WASHINGTON U.Product Manual H-3 .S.Appendix H – Honeywell Service Centers SPAIN Tel. Tel.A. : 41 1 839 2525 UNITED KINGDOM HONEYWELL HOUSE Arlington Business Park BRACKNELL Berkshire RG12 1EB UNITED KINGDOM Tel. : 215 641 3000 VENEZUELA HONEYWELL CA APARTADO 61314 1060 CARACAS VENEZUELA Tel. INDUSTRIAL CONTROLS DIV.

Product Manual 1/99 .DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder H-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder .

8-7 chart replacing. 8-5 capacitive coupling. 4-7 contact noise suppression. See CHTTYP parameter CHTHI parameter. See CHTLO parameter chart parameters set up group. 8-4. 4-48 configuration tips. 4-19 CHTTYP parameter.Index Index —A— ACTION parameter. 4-43 AL HYS parameter. 2-4 troubleshooting. 4-24 diagnostic tests 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . A-2 CE conformity. 2-10 CFGERR error message. 4-40 alarm hysteresis. 8-7 CALTST. 4-22. 4-43 communications replacing PCA. 4-64 AUX OUT parameter. 5-13 calibration set up group. See CURRNG parameter CURRNG parameter. 4-55. 4-34 current outputs. 4-8. 2-22 compensated calibrator. 4-38. 4-65 CTRALG parameter. 5-7 configuration with display. 5-1. 5-1 calibration of outputs (with display). 4-34 CYC2TI parameter. 5-11 selecting factory or field. 4-16 BRNOUT parameter. 4-40 alarm setpoints. 10-3 —D— DBAND parameter. 4-4. 3-14 —C— CAL IN parameter. 4-12 without display. 8-14 without display. 1-1. 4-18 CHTSPD parameter. 4-25. 5-11 CALERR error message. 2-29. 4-22 calibration. See DBAND parameter decimal point location. 6-2 chart high range value. A-9 deadband. 4-45. 4-25 ADDRES parameter. 8-7 calibration of inputs (with display). 4-32 automatic mode. 4-55.Product Manual Index-I . 8-4. 4-17 without display. 5-14 current range. 8-20 wiring. 4-16 entering field values. 6-4 CNFTST. See CHTSPD parameter chart time with display. 4-21. 4-5 configuration record sheet. 8-7 CFGTST. 4-22 control setpoints. 5-11 calibration test (with display). 4-55. 4-18 CHTLO parameter. 8-18 alarms set up group. 4-41 auxilary output set up group. 8-4. 4-51 parts. 8-5 burnout with display. 8-5 COMM parameter. 4-23 CYC TI parameter. See CYC TI parameter —B— BAUD parameter. 4-26 DC load noise suppression. See CHTHI parameter chart low range value. 4-34 cycle timer. A-8 CONTRL parameter. 4-19 circuit breakers. 3-19 chart type. 4-41 chart rotation troubleshooting with display. 4-30. 4-55. 4-23. 4-14 derivative term. 4-43 BIAS parameter. 4-10. 9-11 set up group. 4-26 control set up group. 4-68. 8-7 configuration prompt hierarchy. 4-10. 8-4. 4-38 troubleshooting. 8-4 control algorithm. 2-14 cleaning pen arm. 3-1 configuration checksum test (with display). 4-19 chart plate components. 4-22. 4-33. See CTRALG parameter control hysteresis. 4-54 without display. 4-43 specifications. 4-66 alarms configuration. 8-21 without display. 7-9 AT ERR parameter. See DECMAL parameter DECMAL parameter. 8-7 calibration values. 4-67 troubleshooting. 3-16. 4-38 aligning pens with display. 4-17. 7-7 chart speed. 4-55.

8-7 indicators on display. 4-56 KEY ERROR. 4-56 key functions. 4-29. 4-15. E-8 END ST parameter. 9-9 —G— GAIN 2 parameter. 7-6 with display. See I MIN parameter integral term. A-2 ink cartridges part numbers. 5-1 failsafe mode. 4-29 INZERO parameter. 9-8 testing. See IN TYP parameter input bias with display. 4-56. 2-5 direct action control. 4-8 door assembly parts. 1-1.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder with display. 5-12 —J— J1 connector. 4-10. 8-9 input set up group. 4-44. 5-12 LED indicators. 8-8 input filter. 7-6 digital input PCA replacing. 8-5 FAILSF error message. 8-16 knockout locations. 4-33 grounding. 4-16 FINL SP parameter. 8-6 HOUR parameter. See I RPM parameter. 2-10. 5-12 installation. 4-2. 5-1 FILTER parameter. 2-15 —K— Key error. 4-64. 8-2 electrical noise precautions. 4-34 GAIN parameter. 4-67. 9-9 J2 connector. 4-27. 2-11 —H— heat/cool application. 10-2 —E— EEFAIL error message. 9-11 J10 connector. 4-8 J9 connector. 9-9 testing. A-1 EMI. 2-7 fuses. See ACTION parameter display description. 4-30 FUZZY parameter. 2-1 integral control. 4-55. 7-2. 5-8 impedance coupling. 6-3 INP FL error message. 4-62. 4-17. 8-9 input actuation type. 4-33 I RPM parameter. 4-2.Product Manual 1/99 . 4-16. 4-16 IN PLO parameter. A-1 END 1 parameter. 4-55. 4-27. 4-4 Index-2 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . 4-26 hysteresis. 4-32. 4-33 I2 MIN parameter. 4-28. 8-3. 8-4. 4-2. 8-4 field calibration (with display). 8-6 limit controller. 4-16 IN TYP parameter. 2-14 fuzzy overshoot suppression. 4-33. 4-3. 4-62. 2-3 with display. See INPHI parameter input out of range. See alarm hysteresis and control hysteresis —L— —I— I MIN parameter. 4-60 inductive coupling. 10-3 replacing. 9-8. 2-6. 2-15. 8-8 INPRNG error message. 4-19 HYST parameter. 4-32. 4-34 L DISP parameter. 2-18 digital. 4-59 replacing. 2-20 INSPAN parameter. 4-55. 4-17. 8-16 display cable. 2-20 —F— factory calibration (with display). 4-62. 4-16 input calibration (with display). 4-29. 4-21. 8-8 FAILSF parameter. 4-34 I2 RPM parameter. 9-11 J6 connector. 4-18. 9-9 J13 connector. 4-14 input wiring analog. 4-56. 1-1. 4-36 flush mounting. 9-8. 4-59 replacing. 9-10. A-2 IN PHI parameter. 4-61 keypad description. 4-32 ice bath. 5-1 input failure with display. 4-37 LD CAL parameter. 8-6 external switches. 9-9 digital inputs configuration. 4-45 dimensions. 4-34 HOLD status message. 4-16 input high range value. 4-67. 8-7 electrical noise. 8-4 without display. E-9 error messages.

3-15 operator interface. 4-25 —R— raise switch. E-8 reference accuracy. 2-6. 4-39. 7-7. 8-21 pen arms. 8-15 without display. See POWRUP parameter power wiring. 4-49. See metal oxide varistors —N— NumSPs parameter. 2-2 operating parameters. 4-70 troubleshooting. See communications model number breakdown. 4-32. replacing. 8-14 mounting dimensions. 4-18 pen step test. 5-11.Index configuration. 4-61 operation with display. 2-11 Pn ERR error message. 4-55. 4-18 pen input. See LD CAL parameter LOCK parameter. 4-10. 7-8 PERIOD parameter. 4-70. 4-55. 5-14 —M— maintenance. 2-15 POWRUP parameter. 4-32. 4-4 without display. 2-8 MOVs. 4-54 pens alignment with display. 3-1 RECYCL parameter. 4-4 output wiring current outputs. 4-49 printed circuit assembly replacing. 4-34 RC circuits. 4-18. 2-5 flush. See PB parameter proportional control. 8-21 without display. 6-4 part numbers. 9-6 prompt hierarchy. 4-30. 2-25 outputs limit control. 1-4 motor cable. 6-1 MANRST parameter. 8-13 without display. See MANRST parameter memory test (with display). 4-37 plug locations. 8-18 remote switch 1. 4-29 Modbus. See PWR UP parameter power up state for limit control. 8-17.Product Manual Index-3 . 4-59 without display. 2-5 parts list. 2-7 surface. 4-7. 7-6 PEN0 parameter. 4-26 output set up (with display). 4-23 output calibration (with display). 4-22. 8-9 power up controller mode recall. 2-3. 8-9 metal oxide varistors (MOVs). 5-2 rate. 10-3 replacing. 4-25. 10-4 recording set up with display. 8-12 without display. 5-14 output limits. 9-2. 8-4. 4-28 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . 4-26 OUTALG parameter. 4-49 load calibration values. 4-28. 7-9 maintenance. 4-34 OUTLAG parameter. 4-12. See RATE T parameter RATE parameter. See SW3 raise switch RAMTST. 4-44 —P— P3 connector. 7-7. 6-3 troubleshooting with display. 4-59 limit control. 9-3 pen group prompts. 4-33 PBorGN parameter. 4-64 manual reset. 4-22. 2-29 relays. 4-24. 8-14 panel cutout. 4-21 RATE T parameter. 4-22 —O— operating limits. B-1 relays. 4-2. 2-25. 4-33 manual mode. See REMSW2 parameter remote switch set up group. 4-34 PB parameter. 4-68 resetting. 4-50. 4-32 RATE2T parameter. 4-70 LIMIT parameter. 4-61 recorder failure troubleshooting with display. See REMSW1 parameter remote switch 2. 4-70 OUT HI parameter. 7-5 recorder part numbers. 8-4 memory test (with display). 4-3. 4-26 OUT LO parameter. 8-17 pen alignment set up group. 4-34 PWR UP parameter. See PENIN parameter pen set up group. See resistance-capacitive circuits real time values. 8-21 PENIN parameter. 10-1 PB 2 parameter. 8-5 range values for calibration. 5-1. 4-55. 3-17 pen trace troubleshooting with display. A-7 MINRPM parameter. 4-46. 4-5 proportional band.

See control setpoints and alarm setpoints setup switch. 8-11. 4-36 spare parts. 3-17. 7-9 SW4 lower switch. 4-25. 4-8 without display. E-8 square root of input. 2-26 TB5 terminal. 4-52 without display. 4-62. 4-20 totalizer. 4-32 tuning. 4-30 TUNING status message. 4-35 setpoints. 4-20 resetting. 4-10 SW6 input switches with display. 7-1 TUNE parameter. 3-17 SW2 reset switch. 4-49 SP PROG parameter. 4-51. 4-37 TOTAL parameter. 3-16. See digital inputs REMSW1 parameter. 3-5 switches external. A-6 transmitter delay.Product Manual 1/99 . 3-5 switch settings with display. 4-54. 8-1 without display. 4-50. 4-8. 9-2. 5-1. 4-49 SP LO parameter. 9-1. 2-18 TB3 terminal. 7-1. 4-68 totalizer battery replacing. 2-14. 4-3 setpoint ramp group. 4-36 SP RAMP parameter. 8-4 self-diagnostic (without display). 8-5 step test with display. See SP LO parameter. 8-1. 3-2. E-9 RSTABL parameter. See XmtDLY parameter transmitter input characterization. 8-6 Index-4 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . 4-55. 4-62. 4-21 servo plate replacement. 8-4. 4-20 configuration. 4-68 RUN status message. E-9 SG2 TI parameter. 4-57 without display. 7-9 SW6 burnout switch 5 with display. 8-3 SOKDEV parameter. 9-11 scale factor. 4-21. 4-69 TIMER parameter. 3-15. 6-2 RESET key.DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder remote switches. 6-3 replacing the chart. 3-2. 7-9 SW5 run/setup switch. 4-55. A-1 RPUNIT parameter. 8-9 SW3 raise switch. 9-1 replacing ink cartridges. 4-54 without display. 3-15. 4-62. 10-1 replacing hardware assemblies. See SP HI parameter setpoint high range limit. 2-14 —S— safety precautions. See SW5 run/setup switch surface mounting. 4-49 RESET parameter. 8-6 run switch. 3-5. 4-8 without display. 4-20 reset switch SW2. 7-6 TIM IN parameter. 3-19 status set up group. E-9 software version. 2-15. 8-16 pen step. E-9 SG2 SP parameter. 8-9 tests display and keypad. 4-35. 4-3. 9-10. D-1 tuning set up groupt. 4-20. 4-8. See SW5 run/setup switch SG1 RP parameter. 3-17 self-diagnostic (with display). E-1 status display. 4-9 without display. E-8 SP HI parameter. 4-50. 4-36 time index with display. 7-6. 4-37 display. 3-19 timer configuration. 4-52. 9-9. E-8 START parameter. 4-45 replacement parts. 4-45 REMSW2 parameter. 4-56. 4-15 transmitter wiring. 2-8 SW1 configuration switches with display. 3-17 —T— TB1 terminal. 8-9 resistance-capacitance (RC) circuits. See SCALER parameter SCALER parameter. 4-37 operation. See SP LO parameter setpoint low range limit. See SP LO parameter setpoint program. 5-13 temperature units. 3-1 setpoint high limit. 2-31 troubleshooting with display. 4-15 START 1 parameter. 4-8. 7-5 TB2 terminal. See SP HI parameter setpoint low limit. 3-17. 4-25. 2-2 SPPROG parameter. 4-21. See ACTION parameter RFI. See UNITS parameter TESTFL error message. 7-6. 9-4 set up with display. 9-10 totalizer set up group. 4-4 without display. 7-4. 4-20 transformers. 10-1 specifications. 4-37 startup with display. 3-1. 3-2. A-7 reverse acting control.

9-11 wire bundling. 9-1. 2-26. 2-10 recommended practices. 2-15. 2-11 transmitter power out. 2-14. 2-18 communication. 9-2. 5-1. 2-29 limit control. 4-15 XmtDLY parameter. 910. 2-25. 4-43 XRSET parameter. 2-29. 2-20 for calibration. 4-49 1/99 DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder . 2-22 current outputs. 5-13 insulation. 7-1. 4-8. A-4 relay outputs. 3-17.Product Manual Index-5 . 2-25 routing. 4-70 prerequisites. 451. 8-1. 4-50. A-4 wiring analog inputs. 8-11. 9-9.Index —U— UNITS parameter. 7-4. 2-31 —X— XMITTR parameter. 2-13. 3-16. 2-29 digital inputs. 5-6. 4-14 —W— warnings. 3-15. 4-52.

.

.

Pennsylvania 19034 .Industrial Automation and Control Honeywell. Inc. 1100 Virginia Drive Fort Washington.